Vsx series integrator_reference_manual

product pic here

Integrator’s Reference Manual
for the VSX Series
Version 8.7

August 2007 Edition
3725-21905-005/A
VSX Version 8.7

Trademark Information
Polycom®, the Polycom logo design, SoundStation®, SoundStation VTX 1000®, and Vortex® are registered
trademarks of Polycom, Inc., and Conference Composer™, Global Management System™, ImageShare™, MGC™,
People+Content™, Polycom InstantDesigner™, Polycom PathNavigator™, PowerCam™, Pro-Motion™, Siren™,
StereoSurround™, Visual Concert™, VSX™, and VTX™ are trademarks of Polycom, Inc. in the United States and
various other countries. VISCA is a trademark of Sony Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Patent Information
The accompanying product is protected by one or more U.S. and foreign patents and/or pending patent applications
held by Polycom, Inc.

© 2007 Polycom, Inc. All rights reserved.
Polycom Inc.
4750 Willow Road
Pleasanton, CA 94588-2708
USA
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for
any purpose, without the express written permission of Polycom, Inc. Under the law, reproducing includes translating
into another language or format.
As between the parties, Polycom, Inc. retains title to, and ownership of, all proprietary rights with respect to the software
contained within its products. The software is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty
provision. Therefore, you must treat the software like any other copyrighted material (e.g. a book or sound recording).
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Polycom, Inc. is not responsible
for printing or clerical errors. Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Contents

1 Room Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Setting Up a Room for Video Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Room Layout Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Integrating Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Connecting Polycom Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Connecting Other Video Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Integrating Audio and Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Connecting a VSX 8000 to a Vortex Mixer
and SoundStation VTX 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Connecting a VSX 7000e to a Vortex Mixer
and SoundStation VTX 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Configuring the Vortex, SoundStation VTX 1000,
and VSX System to Work Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

2 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Network Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
LAN Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
ISDN Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Analog Telephone (POTS) Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Serial Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
V.35 NIC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
V.35 and RS-366 Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
RS-449 and RS-366 Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
RS-530 with RS-366 Serial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Video and Camera Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
S-Video Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
BNC to S-Video Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
BNC to S-Video Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
VCR/DVD Composite Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
VGA Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Composite Video Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
PowerCam Plus Primary Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
PowerCam Primary Camera Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
PowerCam Break-Out Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
PowerCam/VISCA Control Cable (VSX 7000e or VSX 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
RS-232 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

iii

Integrator’s Reference Manual for the VSX Series

PowerCam/VISCA Control Cable (VSX 7000 or VSX 7000s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
S-Video to RCA Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Audio Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Audio Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Vortex Cable (VSX 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Balanced Audio Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Vortex Cable (VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, VSX 7000s,
or VSX 7000e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
VSX to VTX Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Visual Concert to VTX Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Subwoofer Volume Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Serial Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
RS-232 Cable (VSX 5000, VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000,
or VSX 7000s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Straight-Through Serial Cable (VSX 7000e or VSX 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Null Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Null Modem Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Content Sharing Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Visual Concert VSX Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
ImageShare II to Computer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
IR Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

3 Using the API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Using the API with an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Configuring the RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Starting an API Session via an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using the API with a LAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Using the API Controller Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

4 System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
About the API Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Availability of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
abk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
addressdisplayedingab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
adminpassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
advnetstats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
alertusertone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
alertvideotone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
all register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
all unregister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
allowabkchanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
allowcamerapresetssetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
allowdialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
allowmixedcalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

iv

Contents

allowstreaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
allowusersetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
areacode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
audiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
audiotransmitlevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
autoanswer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
autoshowcontent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
backlightcompensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
basicmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
bri1enable, bri2enable, bri3enable, bri4enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
briallenable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
calldetail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
calldetailreport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
callencryption (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
callinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
callpreference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
callstate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
callstats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
cameradirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
camerainput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
chaircontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
colorbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
colorscheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
configchange (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
configdisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
configparam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
configpresentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
confirmdiradd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
confirmdirdel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
contentauto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
cts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
daylightsavings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
dcd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
dcdfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
defaultgateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
dhcp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
dialchannels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
dialingdisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
dialingentryfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
diffservaudio, diffservfecc, diffservvideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

v


directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
display (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
displayglobaladdresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
displaygraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
displayipext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
displayipisdninfo (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
displayparams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
dns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
dsr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
dsranswer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
dtr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
dualmonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
dynamicbandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
e164ext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
echocanceller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
echocancellerred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
echocancellerwhite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
enablefirewalltraversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
enablepvec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
enablersvp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
enablesnmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
farcontrolnearcamera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
farnametimedisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
gabk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
gabpassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
gabserverip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
gatekeeperip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
gatekeeperpin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
gatewayareacode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
gatewaycountrycode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
gatewayext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
gatewaynumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
gatewaynumbertype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
gatewayprefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
gatewaysetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
gatewaysuffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
gendial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
gendialtonepots (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
generatetone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
get screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
getcallstate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
gmscity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121

vi

Contents

gmscontactemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
gmscontactfax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
gmscontactnumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
gmscontactperson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
gmscountry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
gmsstate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
gmstechsupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
gmsurl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
graphicsmonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
h239enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
h323name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
h331audiomode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
h331dualstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
h331framerate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
h331videoformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
h331videoprotocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
hangup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
homecallquality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
homemultipoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
homerecentcalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
homesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
homesystemname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
hostname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
ipaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
ipdialspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
ipisdninfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
ipprecaudio, ipprecfecc, ipprecvideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
ipstat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
isdnareacode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
isdncountrycode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
isdndialingprefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
isdndialspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
isdnnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
isdnswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
keypadaudioconf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
lanport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
linestate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
localdatetime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
marqueedisplaytext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
maxgabinternationalcallspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
maxgabinternetcallspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
maxgabisdncallspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167

vii


maxtimeincall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
mcupassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
meetingpassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
midrangespeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
monitor1 (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
monitor1screensaveroutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
monitor2 (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174
monitor2screensaveroutput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-175
mpautoanswer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-176
mpmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
mtumode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-178
mtusize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-180
muteautoanswer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-181
natconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-182
nath323compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183
nearloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-184
netstats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-185
nonotify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-186
notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187
ntpmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190
ntpserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-191
numberofmonitors (deprecated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-192
numberofrouterhops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-193
numdigitsdid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194
numdigitsext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-195
overlayname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-196
overlaytheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-197
pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-198
phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-199
ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-200
pip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-201
popupinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-203
preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-204
priareacode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-205
pricallbycall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-206
prichannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207
pricsu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-209
pridialchannels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-210
priintlprefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-211
prilinebuildout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-212
prilinesignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
primarycallchoice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214
primarycamera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-215
prinumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-216
prinumberingplan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-217

viii

Contents

prioutsideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-218
priswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-219
reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-220
recentcalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-221
registerall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222
registerthissystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-223
remotecontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224
remotemonenable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-226
repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-227
requireacctnumtodial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-228
roomphonenumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-229
rs232 baud, rs232port1 baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-230
rs232 mode, rs232port1 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-231
rs232monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-232
rs366dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-233
rt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-234
rts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-235
run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-236
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-237
screencontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-238
secondarycallchoice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-239
serialnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-240
setaccountnumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-241
showgatekeeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-242
showpopup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-243
sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244
sleeptext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-245
sleeptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-246
snapshottimeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-247
snmpadmin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-248
snmpcommunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-249
snmpconsoleip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-250
snmplocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-251
snmpsystemdescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-252
snmptrapversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-253
soundeffectsvolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-254
spidnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-255
st . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-257
stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-258
streamannounce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-259
streamaudioport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-260
streamenable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-261
streammulticastip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-262
streamrestoredefaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-263
streamrouterhops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-264
streamspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-265

ix


streamvideoport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-266
subnetmask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-267
subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-268
subwooferoffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-269
sysinfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-270
systemname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-271
tcpports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-272
techsupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-273
teleareacode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274
telenumber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-275
telnetmonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-276
timediffgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-277
traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-278
typeofservice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-279
udpports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-280
unregisterall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-281
usefixedports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-282
usegatekeeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-283
usepathnavigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-284
useroompassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-285
v35broadcastmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-286
v35dialingprotocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-287
v35num . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-288
v35portsused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-289
v35prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-290
v35profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-291
v35suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-292
validateacctnum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-293
vcbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-294
vcraudioout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-295
vcrrecordsource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-296
vcstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-297
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-298
vgaqualitypreference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-299
videocallorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-300
voicecallorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-301
volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-302
vortex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-303
vtxstate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-304
waitfor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-305
wake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-306
wanipaddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-307
webport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-308
whoami . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-309
winsresolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-310
winsserver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-311

x

Contents

xmladvnetstats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-312
xmlnetstats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-313

A Room Design and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Room Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Ceiling Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Interior Design and Finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Furniture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Room Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Light Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Room Preparation Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Audio Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Audio Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Audio Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Range/Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Video Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Video Projection for Use in Videoconference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Room Control Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

B Categorical List of API Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
API Utility Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Audio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Call Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Cameras, Content, and Monitors Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Diagnostics and Statistics Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Global Services Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Home Screen Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Local Directory Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
IP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
ISDN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Telephony Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Notification Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Security and Permissions Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Serial Port Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Streaming Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Systems Settings Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

xi


C Commands that Prompt Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

D API Changes in This Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Commands Introduced in Version 8.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Commands Newly Deprecated in Version 8.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

E Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
B Channel Status Message Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

F IR Codes for Non-Polycom Remotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1

xii

1
Room Integration

Setting Up a Room for Video Conferencing
For detailed information about setting up a room for video conferencing, refer
to Room Design and Layout on page A-1.

Room Layout Examples
Use the following diagrams as examples for setting up a conference room with
Polycom® VSX™ systems. Polycom recommends that you contract an
experienced contractor to assure all the components operate as a single
cohesive system.

Small Conference Room

Acoustic Panels Dry Erase Board

Video
Light

VSX Set-Top System
on Flat Panel Monitor Polycom
Microphone
Media Center with
Built-In Speakers
Video
Light

Acoustic Quality
Drapes

1-1


Large Conference Room

Acoustic Panels

SoundStation
VTX 1000

Document Camera

VSX Component System
and PowerCam™ Plus

Flat Panel Flat Panel
Monitor 1 Monitor 2

Network Outlets
Media Center Power Outlets

Classroom

1-2

Room Integration

Teacher’s Podium
Touch Panel

Computer

VSX
Document Camera

Monitor 1

VSX Component
System with
Monitor for
PowerCam Plus
and Vortex® VGA Out

Table-Top Microphones
Monitor 2 on
Media Cart
Camera 2

1-3


Auditorium

Acoustic Panels

VGA Out

Control
Room
PowerCam
Plus Camera
VSX Component
System and
Vortex
Camera 2
Monitor 1
Touch
Panel

Monitor 2
Speaker Podium
Ceiling Microphones

1-4

Room Integration

Integrating Video
The following sections describe how to connect cameras to VSX systems. After
you connect a camera to a VSX system, refer to the Administrator’s Guide for the
VSX Series for information about configuring the camera options in the user
interface.

Connecting Polycom Cameras
You can connect the VSX 8000 and VSX 7000e systems to either a PowerCam
or PowerCam Plus camera from Polycom, or to other supported cameras. You
must use a PowerCam Plus as the main camera, not as a secondary camera.
Refer to the release notes for a list of supported PTZ cameras.
In addition to their integrated main camera, VSX 7000 and VSX 7000s systems
provide an S-Video input for a second camera. You can use the RS-232 serial
port on the VSX 7000 or VSX 7000s system for camera control. Refer to the
release notes for a list of supported PTZ cameras.
You can connect a camera to the VCR video input on any VSX system (except
the VSX 3000 executive desktop systems). On the VSX 6000 and VSX 6000A
systems, the video input is for a composite video signal. VSX 5000, VSX 6000,
and VSX 6000A systems do not provide pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) control for a
second camera.

Plenum-rated CAT5 cable adapters are available from several
manufacturers such as Sound Control Technologies and Vaddio. These
cables allow you to connect cameras up to several hundred feet away.

1-5


PowerCam as the Main Camera up to 10 ft Away

You can connect a PowerCam (part number 2215-50370-001) to a VSX 8000 as
the main camera up to 10 ft away using:

• PowerCam Primary cable shown on page 2-16

• S-Video to BNC adapter shown on page 2-11

1 1

1 1

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VG A
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VG A LAN

You can connect a PowerCam (part number 2215-50370-001) to a VSX 7000e
as the main camera up to 10 ft away using:

• PowerCam Primary cable shown on page 2-16

1 1

1 1

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

1-6

Room Integration

PowerCam as the Main Camera More Than 10 ft Away
The following extension kits are available, which include the power supply,
PowerCam Break-Out cable, PowerCam/VISCA Control cable, and S-Video
cable:

• 7230-21703-001 (50 ft)

• 7230-21704-001 (100 ft)
• 7230-21705-001 (150 ft)

• 7230-21706-001 (200 ft)

the main camera for distances more than 10 ft away using:

• PowerCam Break-Out cable shown on page 2-17

• PowerCam/VISCA Control cable shown on page 2-18

• S-Video cable on page 2-9


• Power Supply (part number 1465-52621-036)

1 1

1 1 2

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VGA
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VGA LAN

1-7


as the main camera for distances more than 10 ft away using:





1 1

1 1

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

PowerCam as the Secondary Camera
The following kits are available, which include the power supply, PowerCam
Break-Out cable, PowerCam/VISCA Control cable, and S-Video cable:

• 7230-22231-001 (50 ft)
• 7230-22232-001 (100 ft)

1-8

Room Integration

the secondary camera using:





2

1 1 2

2

IOIOIO
2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VGA
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VGA LAN

1-9


as the secondary camera using:





IOIOIO
2
2

IOIOIO
2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

1 - 10

Room Integration

the secondary camera using:





0101 2

0101

VGA
2 2
3

1
LAN

1 - 11


You can connect a PowerCam (part number 2215-50370-001) to a VSX 7000s
as the secondary camera using:





2

0101

2

101010

24V 3A VGA
LAN 1

If you connect a PTZ camera to a serial port, set RS-232 Mode to Sony PTZ on
the Serial Ports screen.

1 - 12

Room Integration

PowerCam Plus as the Main Camera up to 10 ft Away

You can connect a PowerCam Plus (part number 2215-50200-001) to a
VSX 8000 as the main camera up to 10 ft away using:

• PowerCam Plus Primary cable shown on page 2-15


1 1

1 1

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VG A
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VG A LAN

VSX 7000e as the main camera up to 10 ft away using:


1 1

1 1

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

1 - 13


PowerCam Plus as the Main Camera More Than 10 ft Away

VSX 8000 as the main camera for distances more than 10 ft away using:




1 1

1 1

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VG A
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VG A LAN

VSX 7000e as the main camera for distances more than 10 ft away using:



1 1

1 1

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

1 - 14

Room Integration

Connecting Other Video Cameras
Refer to the release notes for a list of supported Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ)
cameras.

To connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 8000 system as the main camera:
You can connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 8000 using:




1 1

1 1

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VGA
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VGA LAN

1 - 15


To connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000e system as the main camera:
You can connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000e using:



1 1

1 1

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

To connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 8000 system as the secondary camera:
You can connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 8000 as the secondary camera using:



2

1 1 2

2

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VGA
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VGA LAN

1 - 16

Room Integration

To connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000e system as the secondary camera:
You can connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000e as the secondary camera using:



2

1 1 2

2

2

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

To connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000s system as the secondary camera:
You can connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000s as the secondary camera using:



0101 2

2

101010

24V 3A VGA
LAN 1

1 - 17


To connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000 system as the secondary camera:
You can connect a PTZ camera to a VSX 7000 as the secondary camera using:



0101 2

0101

VGA
2 2
3

1
LAN

Integrating Audio and Content
For detailed information about connecting a VSX system to a Vortex mixer and
SoundStation VTX 1000® conference phone, refer to the Vortex application
notes in the Voice section of the Polycom web site at www.polycom.com.

Polycom strongly recommends using Polycom InstantDesigner™ to get started with
your Polycom Vortex mixer integration. InstantDesigner resolves many common
issues with connections and configuration settings.
If you have more line inputs, you may use one of the Mic/Line level inputs instead of
a line level input, but you need to disable all processing on that Mic/Line input
(AEC, AGC, NC, Automixer), disable Phantom Power, and set the input to line level
versus the default of mic level.

1 - 18

Room Integration

Connecting a VSX 8000 to a Vortex Mixer and SoundStation VTX 1000
Connect the VSX 8000 to the Vortex mixer using:
• Vortex cable shown on page 2-24
• VSX to VTX™ cable shown on page 2-27

A B C

A B C

IOIOIO

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 1 2 VGA
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VGA LAN

Connecting a VSX 7000e to a Vortex Mixer and SoundStation VTX 1000
Connect the VSX 7000e to the Vortex mixer using:
• Vortex cables shown on page 2-26
• Serial cable shown on page 2-32
• VSX to VTX cable shown on page 2-27

A B C

A B C

IOIOIO

90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A

3 2
PC CARD
1 1 VGA
VCR/DVD

2

IOIOIO 2 VGA 2 LAN

1 - 19


Configuring the Vortex, SoundStation VTX 1000, and VSX System to Work
Together
1. On the SoundStation VTX 1000:
a Make sure the phone has software version 1.50.009 or later.
b Select Menu > Admin Setup > Phone System > Vortex Mode to put
the SoundStation VTX 1000 in Vortex mode.
c Select Menu > Admin Setup > Audio Setup > AUX Input and choose
Other Input.
d Select Menu > Admin Setup > Audio Setup > AUX Output and
choose Subwoofer.
2. Configure the Vortex to recognize the SoundStation VTX 1000
input/output, using Conference Composer™. Refer to the Interfacing to
the SoundStation VTX 1000 with Vortex Devices application note in the
Voice section of the Polycom web site at www.polycom.com.
3. Configure the Vortex to work correctly with the VSX system. Refer to the
Vortex/VSX 8000 Integration application note in the Voice section of the
Polycom web site at www.polycom.com.
4. On the VSX system, go to System > Admin Settings > Audio > Next and
make these selections:
a Set the audio input:
—VSX 8000: Set Input Type to Line Input.
—VSX 6000, VSX 7000, and VSX 7000e: Set Line Input to Audio
Mixer.
b Disable Echo Canceller.
c Disable the system microphones by deselecting Enable Polycom
Microphones.
5. On the VSX system, go to System > Admin Settings > General Settings >
Serial Port and set the RS-232 Mode to Vortex Mixer. Verify that the
baud rate of the VSX system matches that of the Vortex.
6. Make sure the VSX system input to the Vortex is assigned to the
appropriate AEC reference signal if the VSX system will be used in Mono
mode (Standard AEC Operation). If using Polycom InstantDesigner to
create the configuration settings for the Vortex, the reference will be set
automatically.

1 - 20

2
Cables

This chapter includes information about cables that can be used with a
VSX system. Please note that drawings and part numbers are provided for
reference only. Compliance information is provided for the Restriction of
certain Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS).

Network Cables

LAN Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to the LAN. It has orange RJ-45 connectors
on both ends and is used with all systems. The maximum approved length for
this cable is 100 ft (30 m).

Length Part Number RoHS Compliant

12 ft (3.6 m) 2457-08343-001 Yes

CONN. RJ-45
( x2 )

P1 P2 PIN 8 PIN 8

PIN PIN
# #
P1 P2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8 12 FEET +/- 3"

Drawings and part numbers are provided for reference only. Polycom claims no responsibility
or liability for the quality, performance, or reliability of cables based on these reference
drawings, other than cables provided by Polycom. Contact your Polycom distributor or
Polycom Custom/Vertical Products to order cables that meet the appropriate manufacturing
tolerances, quality, and performance parameters for your application.

2-1


ISDN Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to a BRI or PRI line. It has clear RJ-45
connectors on both ends and is used with all VSX systems that have ISDN
capability. The maximum approved length for this cable is 50 ft (15 m).


20 ft (6.6 m) 2457-08548-001 Yes


PRI Pin Assignments
The following illustration and table show the pin assignments for the PRI port
on the VSX 8000.

Pin Signal Name
Pin 8 1 Receive Ring
2 Receive Tip
Pin 1 3 No Connection
4 Transmit Ring
5 Transmit Tip
6 No Connection
7 No Connection
8 No Connection

2-2

Cables

Analog Telephone (POTS) Cable
This cable connects a VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 to an analog telephone line. It has
pink RJ-11 connectors on both ends. The maximum approved length for this
cable is 100 ft (30 m).


12 ft (3.6 m) 2457-20071-001 Yes


2-3


V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Serial Adapter
This adapter is used when connecting a VSX system to other third-party
network equipment. It adapts the 68-pin interface to an industry standard
44-pin interface used by some network interface equipment. It is used with
VSX systems that have a V.35/RS-449/RS-530 serial network interface card
(NIC) installed.


6 in (15.23 cm) 2457-21264-200 Yes

Peripheral Link
V.35 HD-68 Pinout Notes (direction from V.35 module (DTE))
68 pin Signal Name Signal Type From card Function V.35 RS530-DB25 RS4449-DB37 RS366-DB25
Shield V.35/RS449/RS530 A 19 7,18,19#
12 Receive Data A Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 R 3 6
11 Receive Data B Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 T 16 24
10 Send Timing A Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 Y 15 5
9 Send Timing B Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 AA 12 23
29 Data Set Ready (DSR) Single Ended in V.35 E
28 Request To Send (RTS) Single Ended out V.35 C
27 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Single Ended out V.35 H
34 Digit Present (DPR) Single Ended out RS366 2
24 Abandon Call/Retry (ACR) Single Ended in RS366 3
32 Call Request (CRQ) Single Ended out RS366 4
26 Present Next Digit (PND) Single Ended in RS366 5
21 Data Line Occupied (DLO) Single Ended in RS366 22
14 Receive Timing A Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 V 17 8
13 Receive Timing B Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 X 9 26
8 Terminal Timing A Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 U 24 17
7 Terminal Timing B Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 W 11 35
15 Request To Send (RTS) A Differential out RS449/RS530 4 7
16 Request To Send (RTS) B Differential out RS449/RS530 19 25
35** Receive Common Gnd RS449 20
20 BCD Dial Digit Bit 1 (NB1) Single Ended out RS366 14
2** Signal Ground Gnd V.35/RS366 B 7,18,19
6 Send Data A Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 P 2 4
5 Send Data B Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 S 14 22
reserved (Ascend select line)
63 Clear To Send (CTS) A Differential in RS449/RS530 5 9
64 Clear To Send (CTS) B Differential in RS449/RS530 13 27
61 Data Mode (DM-DSR) A Differential in RS449/RS530 6 11
62 Data Mode (DM-DSR) B Differential in RS449/RS530 22 29
65 Receiver Ready (RR-DCD) A Differential in RS449/RS530 8 13
66 Receiver Ready (RR-DCD) B Differential in RS449/RS530 10 31
4** Send Common Gnd RS530 7 37
33 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Single Ended in V.35 F
18 Terminal Ready (TR-DTR) A Differential out RS449/RS530 20 12
17 Terminal Ready (TR-DTR) B Differential out RS449/RS530 23 30
3 V.35 Cable Connected ground to indicate a V.35 cable is attached 7,18,19*
1 RS449 Cable Connected ground to indicate a RS449 cable is attached 7,18,19^#
22 Distant Station Connected (DSC) Single Ended in RS366 13
30 Clear To Send (CTS) Single Ended in V.35 D
31 Ring Indicate (RI) (Incoming Call) Single Ended in V.35/RS449 J 15
68 LOS A Differential out RS530 crypto 18 3
67 LOS B Differential out RS530 crypto 21 21
* For V.35, connect pin 3 of 68 pin connector to ground
^For RS449, connect pin 1 of 68 pin connector to ground
#For RS530, connect pins 1 and 3 of 68 pin connector to ground
** Gnd pins are 2,4, 35-60


2-4

Cables

V.35 NIC Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to Ascend network equipment. It is used
with the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 serial adapter on page 2-4 to connect to network
equipment that has the HD-44 pin interface. It has HD-44 M connectors on
both ends and is used with VSX systems that have a serial network interface
card (NIC) installed.


5 ft (1.65 m) 2457-10608-200 Yes


2-5


V.35 and RS-366 Serial Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to third-party network equipment. It is used
equipment that has a V.35/RS-366 interface. It is HD-44 M to “Y” Winchester
34M/RS-366 DB-25M and is used with VSX systems that have a serial network
interface card (NIC) installed.


5 ft (1.65 m) 2457-10609-200 Yes


2-6

Cables

RS-449 and RS-366 Serial Cable
equipment that has an RS-449/RS-366 interface. It is HD-44 M to “Y” RS-449
DB-37M/RS-366 DB-25M and is used with VSX systems that have a serial
network interface card (NIC) installed.


5 ft (1.65 m) 2457-10610-200 Yes


2-7


RS-530 with RS-366 Serial Cable
equipment that has an RS-530/RS-366 interface. It is HD-68M to “Y” DB-25M
and is used with VSX systems that have a serial network interface card (NIC)
installed.


5 ft (1.65 m) 2457-21263-200 Yes

Peripheral Link V.35 HD-68 Pinout Notes (direction from V.35 module (DTE))
68 pin Signal Name Signal Type From card Function RS530-DB25 RS366-DB25
Shield V.35/RS449/RS530 7,18,19#
12 Receive Data A Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 3
11 Receive Data B Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 16
10 Send Timing A Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 15
9 Send Timing B Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 12
29 Data Set Ready (DSR) Single Ended in V.35
28 Request To Send (RTS) Single Ended out V.35
27 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Single Ended out V.35
34 Digit Present (DPR) Single Ended out RS366 2
24 Abandon Call/Retry (ACR) Single Ended in RS366 3
32 Call Request (CRQ) Single Ended out RS366 4
26 Present Next Digit (PND) Single Ended in RS366 5
21 Data Line Occupied (DLO) Single Ended in RS366 22
14 Receive Timing A Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 17
13 Receive Timing B Differential in V.35/RS449/RS530 9
8 Terminal Timing A Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 24
7 Terminal Timing B Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 11
15 Request To Send (RTS) A Differential out RS449/RS530 4
16 Request To Send (RTS) B Differential out RS449/RS530 19
35** Receive Common Gnd RS449
2** Signal Ground Gnd V.35/RS366 7,18,19
6 Send Data A Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 2
5 Send Data B Differential out V.35/RS449/RS530 14
63 Clear To Send (CTS) A Differential in RS449/RS530 5
64 Clear To Send (CTS) B Differential in RS449/RS530 13
61 Data Mode (DM-DSR) A Differential in RS449/RS530 6
62 Data Mode (DM-DSR) B Differential in RS449/RS530 22
65 Receiver Ready (RR-DCD) A Differential in RS449/RS530 8
66 Receiver Ready (RR-DCD) B Differential in RS449/RS530 10
4** Send Common Gnd RS530 7
33 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Single Ended in V.35
18 Terminal Ready (TR-DTR) A Differential out RS449/RS530 20
17 Terminal Ready (TR-DTR) B Differential out RS449/RS530 23
3 V.35 Cable Connected ground to indicate a V.35 cable is attached 7,18,19*
1 RS449 Cable Connected ground to indicate a RS449 cable is attached 7,18,19^#
22 Distant Station Connected (DSC) Single Ended in RS366 13
30 Clear To Send (CTS) Single Ended in V.35
31 Ring Indicate (RI) (Incoming Call)Single Ended in V.35/RS449
68 LOS A Differential out RS530 crypto 18
67 LOS B Differential out RS530 crypto 21
* For V.35, connect pin 3 of 68 pin connector to ground
^For RS449, connect pin 1 of 68 pin connector to ground
#For RS530, connect pins 1 and 3 of 68 pin connector to ground
** Gnd pins are 2,4, 35-60


2-8

Cables

Video and Camera Cables

S-Video Cable
These cables connect a VSX system to a monitor or camera. They have yellow
4-pin mini-DIN connectors on both ends and are used with all VSX systems
except the VSX 3000.The VSX 8000 system may require the BNC to S-Video
adapter on page 2-11. The maximum approved length for this cable is 200 ft
(60 m).


25 ft (7.6 m) 2457-08409-002 Yes

8 ft (2.4 m) 2457-08410-002 Yes

50 ft (15 m) 2457-09204-200 Yes

MINI-DIN MALE 4 POS. ( x2 )

25 FEET +/- 2"

P3 P4 P3 P4

P1 P2 P1 P2


2-9


BNC to S-Video Cable
This cable connects S-Video devices to a VSX 8000. It is 4-pin male mini-DIN
to dual BNC. The maximum approved length for this cable is 100 ft (30 m).


6 ft (1.8 m) 2457-21489-200 Yes

Dimensions are in millimeters


2 - 10

Cables

BNC to S-Video Adapter
This adapter may be required when connecting standard S-Video cables to a
VSX 8000. It is dual BNC to 4-pin female mini-DIN.


1 ft (.3 m) 2457-21490-200 Yes

Dimensions are in millimeters


2 - 11


VCR/DVD Composite Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to a VCR or DVD player. It has triple RCA
connectors on both ends and is used with all VSX systems. The VSX 8000
system requires the S-Video to RCA adapter on page 2-22. The maximum
approved length for this cable is 50 ft (15 m).


8 ft (2.6 m) 2457-08412-001 —


2 - 12

Cables

VGA Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to a VGA monitor. It has HD-15 high-density
subminiature connectors on both ends and is used with all VSX systems except
the VSX 3000. The VSX 6000 and VSX 7000 require a display adapter.


30 ft (9 m) 2457-09211-001 —


2 - 13


Composite Video Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to a monitor or camera. It has single yellow
RCA connectors on both ends and is used with VSX 6000, VSX 7000, and
VSX 8000 systems.The VSX 8000 requires the S-Video to RCA adapter on page
2-22. The maximum approved length for this cable is 100 ft (30 m).


25 ft (7.6 m) 2457-09207-001 —


2 - 14

Cables

PowerCam Plus Primary Cable
This cable connects aVSX 7000e or VSX 8000 to a Polycom PowerCam Plus
camera. It has 4-pin mini-DIN and DB-15 connectors on both ends. The
VSX 8000 system requires the S-Video to BNC adapter on page 2-11.


9 ft 10 in (3 m) 1457-50105-002 Yes

30 ft (9 m) 1457-50105-230 Yes

50 ft (15 m) 1457-50105-250 Yes

100 ft (30 m) 1457-50105-300 Yes

150 ft (45 m) 1457-50105-350 Yes

200mm / 7.87" 200mm / 7.87"

P3 P4
P1 P2 40mm / 1.57"

40mm / 1.57"

3 Meters / 9' 10"
P1 Connector P2 Connector
Pin # Signal Name Pin # Signal Name
1 Arm Mic 1 Arm Mic
2 Left Mic 2 Left Mic
3 A GND 3 A GND
4 Cam ID Bit 4 Cam ID Bit
5 P GND 5 P GND
6 +12V 6 +12V
7 SW-RX/SN-TX 7 SW-RX/SN-TX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8 IR signal 8 IR signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
9 Center Mic 9 Center Mic 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

10 Right Mic 10 Right Mic
Front View
11 A GND 11 A GND Front View
of Connector
12 P GND 12 P GND of Connector
13 +12V 13 +12V
3 4 14 SW-TX/SN-RX 14 SW-TX/SN-RX
15 IR return 15 IR return 3 4
1 2
P3 4 Pin mini Din P4 4 Pin mini Din 1 2
1 A GND 1 A GND
2 A GND 2 A GND
3 Luma 3 Luma
4 Chroma 4 Chroma


2 - 15


PowerCam Primary Camera Cable
This cable connects the VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 to a Polycom PowerCam
camera. It is 8-pin mini-DIN to 4-pin mini-DIN and DB-15. The maximum
approved length for this cable is 10 ft (3 m).


9 ft 10 in (3 m) 1457-50338-002 Yes

For distances more than 10 ft (3 m) use the PowerCam breakout cable
(2457-50526-200) on page 2-17, the PowerCam/VISCA control cable
(1457-50527-201) on page 2-18, the S-Video cable on page 2-9, and a power
supply (1465-52621-036).

200mm / 7.87"
1

3
4
2

4Pin Mini Din
Male
P3
40mm
(1.57")
P2
Molded PVC strain relief Pan Int'l 73069-008-T06
8 Pin Mini Din
1

Male
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8

2
P1

3 4
6 7

1
4-40 Jack screw
3 Meters +/- 50.80mm
15 Pin D-sub P1 15 Pin D Connector P2 8 Pin mini Din
Male Pin # Signal Name Wire Type Pin # Signal Name
1-4 N/C
5 PGND 22AWG wire 3 DGND
6 +12V 22 AWG wire 7 +12V
7 SW-RX/SN-TX 30 AWG wire 2 SW-RX/SN-TX
8 IR-SIGNAL 30 AWG wire 4 IR_SIGNAL
9-11 N/C
12 P GND 22 AWG wire 3 DGND
13 +12V 22 AWG wire 7 +12V
14 SW-TX/SN-RX 30 AWG wire 1 SW-TX/SN-RX
15 IR RETURN 30 AWG wire 3 DGND
SHIELD DRAIN wire SHIELD
P3 4 Pin Mini Din
1 RTN Coax Shield 5 GVID
2 RTN Coax Shield 5 GVID
3 Luma Micro Coax 6 Luma
4 Chroma Micro Coax 8 Chroma
SHIELD DRAIN wire SHIELD


2 - 16

Cables

PowerCam Break-Out Cable
This cable connects S-Video and control cables and a power supply to a
Polycom PowerCam camera. This combination is required when using the
PowerCam as either the primary or the secondary camera when the camera is
more than 10 ft away from the system. It is 8-pin mini-DIN to 3-way breakout
block and is used with VSX 7000, VSX 7000s, VSX 7000e, and VSX 8000
systems.
For VSX 7000 or VSX 7000s systems, use this cable with the S-Video cable on
page 2-9 and control cable (2457-21713-201 or 2457-21713-202) on page 2-21.
For VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 systems, use with the S-Video cable on page 2-9,
control cable (1457-50527-201) on page 2-18 for a primary camera, and control
cable (1457-50527-201) on page 2-18 for a secondary camera.
A separate power supply is required (part number 1465-52621-036).


6 ft (1.8 m) 2457-50526-200 Yes

P2
Molded PVC strain relief
8 7 6 4 3
5 4 3
2 1
2 1

8 Pin Mini Din
P1 6' ± 2.0"
J2 J1 Male
4 Pin
8 Pin DC
Mini Din
Mini Din Jack
Female
Female


2 - 17


PowerCam/VISCA Control Cable (VSX 7000e or VSX 8000)

8-pin mini-DIN to DB-15
This cable connects VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 main camera inputs to a
non-Polycom camera using a VISCA 8-pin DIN connector, or to a Polycom
PowerCam break-out cable with a PowerCam camera.
The 8-pin mini-DIN to DB-15 cable is not qualified and should not be used. As
stated below, this information is provided for your reference only and
Polycom claims no responsibility or liability for the use of this information.
Instead, Polycom recommends the 8-pin mini-DIN to DB-9 and the DB-15 to
DB-9 adapter on 2-20, which is included with the VSX 8000 system.


50 ft (15 m) 1457-50527-201 Yes

8 Pin Mini Din
P2 Male
1

5
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2
3 4
P1

6 7

1
50' ± 3.0"
15 Pin D-sub
Male
P1 15 Pin D Connector P2 VISCA 8 Pin mini Din
Pin # Signal Name Pin # Signal Name
1-6, 9-11, 13 NC 1, 2, 8 NC
7 SW-RX/SN-TX 3 SW-RX/SN-TX
8 IR-SIGNAL 7 IR OUT
12 P GND 4 GND
14 SW-TX/SN-RX 5 SW-TX/SN-RX
15 IR RETURN 6 GND
SHIELD SHIELD


2 - 18

Cables

8-pin mini-DIN to DB-9
This cable connects VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 serial port inputs to a non-Polycom
camera using a VISCA 8-pin DIN connector, or to a Polycom PowerCam
break-out cable with a PowerCam camera. It is 8-pin mini-DIN to DB-9.
RTS/CTS and IR are not supported on this cable.


50 ft (15 m) 2457-10029-200 Yes


2 - 19


RS-232 Adapter
This adapter is included with the VSX 7000e and VSX 8000 and is used to
convert the primary camera control input port for connecting the control port
of non-Polycom cameras to the system as the main camera. This does not carry
any IR signals to the system. It is DB-15 to DB-9.


— 2457-21930-002 Yes

40-45MM 15.0
15.0

33.3
41.6

9-PIN MALE
D-SUB 15-PIN MALE
D-SUB

CONNECTION TABLE
9-PIN 15-PIN SIGNAL
2 7 RXD/TXD
3 14 TXD/RXD
5 12 GND
ALL OTHERS N/C N/A


2 - 20

Cables

PowerCam/VISCA Control Cable (VSX 7000 or VSX 7000s)
This cable connects a VSX 7000 or VSX 7000s to a camera VISCA port, or to the
PowerCam Break-Out Cable on page 2-17. It has 8-pin mini-DIN male
connectors on both ends. An S-Video cable is also required. IR from the camera
is not supported on this cable.


25 ft (7.6 m) 2457-21713-201 Yes

50 ft (15 m) 2457-21713-202 Yes


2 - 21


S-Video to RCA Adapter
This adapter is used when connecting a standard composite video cable (or the
video jack on a VCR cable) into an S-Video connector on a VSX 8000. It is
yellow RCA to 4-pin mini-DIN.


1.5 in 1517-08822-002 Yes


2 - 22

Cables

Audio Cables

Audio Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to an external audio system. It has dual RCA
connectors (red/white) on both ends and is used with all systems except the
VSX 3000. The maximum approved length for this cable is 100 ft (30 m).


25 ft (7.6 m) 2457-09212-002 Yes

RED INSULATION (2X)

WHITE INSULATION (2X)

RED RED

WHT WHT

6 IN. ± 0.5 IN. OVER MOLD "RCA" CONNECTORS
(2X)

25 FEET +/- 3"

RED RED

WHT WHT


2 - 23


Vortex Cable (VSX 8000)
This cable connects a VSX 8000 to a Polycom Vortex mixer. It has four
mini-Phoenix connectors and one DB-9 connector on each end.


6 ft (1.8 m) 2457-21978-200 Yes

1829.0 +/- 50
3
2 (203 REF) 1422.0 (203 REF)
1

9-POSITION P6
P2
D-SUBMINIATURE 9-POSITION
PLUG P7 D-SUBMINIATURE
P3 RECEPTACLE
56.0

P1 J1 9
5
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
6 1
7 2 P4 P8
8 3
9 4
5 P5 WRAP LABEL P9
4 X 203.0
4 X 305.0

3.5mm PITCH 3-POSITION
PHOENIX PLUG PN 1840379 (8 PL)
WIRING CHART
1 FROM TO WIRE TYPE WIRE USE
2
3 P1-2 J1-2 SIGNAL
P1-3 J1-3 SIGNAL
PIN # P1-5 J1-5 SIGNAL
1 Signal + P1-7 J1-7 A SIGNAL
2 Signal - (return) P1-8 J1-8 SIGNAL
3 Shield/darin wire/ground P1-SHELL J1-SHELL SHIELD
PINS 1, 4, 6, 9 ARE N/C N/A
P2-1 P6-1 SIGNAL
P2-2 P6-2 B SIGNAL
P2-3 P6-3 SHIELD (DRAIN WIRE)
P3-1 P7-1 SIGNAL
P3-2 P7-2 B SIGNAL
P4-1 P8-1 SIGNAL
P4-2 P8-2 B SIGNAL
P5-1 P9-1 SIGNAL
P5-2 P9-2 B SIGNAL


2 - 24

Cables

Balanced Audio Connector
This connector connects audio input and output to the VSX 8000. It is a 3-pin
Phoenix connector.


— 1515-20881-003 Yes
Phoenix part number: 1939921

Top View
1
2
3
PIN #
1 Signal +
2 Signal - (return)
3 Shield/drain wire/ground


2 - 25


Vortex Cable (VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, VSX 7000s, or VSX 7000e)
These cables connect VSX systems with RCA audio outputs to a Polycom
Vortex mixer. They are mini-Phoenix to RCA and are used with the VSX 6000,
VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, VSX 7000s, and VSX 7000e systems.


12 ft (3.6 m) 2457-80100-003 Yes
(white RCA)

12 ft (3.6 m) 2457-80100-004 Yes
(black RCA)

12 FEET +/- 2"


2 - 26

Cables

VSX to VTX Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to the Polycom SoundStation VTX 1000
conference phone. It is black offset RJ-11 to RJ-45 and is used with all
VSX systems except the VSX 3000. The maximum approved length for this


30 ft (9 m) 2457-21626-001 Yes

50 ft (15 m) 2457-21626-050 Yes


2 - 27


Visual Concert to VTX Cable
This cable connects the Polycom SoundStation VTX 1000 conference phone to
a Polycom Visual Concert™ that is already connected to a VSX system. It is
black offset RJ-11 to RJ-45 and is used with VSX 5000, VSX 6000, VSX 6000A,
VSX 7000, and VSX 7000s systems. The maximum approved length for this


10 ft (3 m) 2457-21624-001 Yes

3 ft (0.9 m) 2457-21625-001 Yes


2 - 28

Cables

Subwoofer Volume Attenuator
This attenuator plugs into the Volume Control RJ-11 port on the subwoofer
that comes with the Polycom stereo speaker kit. The attenuator is required for
proper operation of the acoustic echo cancellation. It has an RJ-11 connector.


3.5 in (9 cm) 1457-52415-001 —


2 - 29


Serial Cables

RS-232 Cable (VSX 5000, VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, or VSX 7000s)
This cable connects a VSX system to an RS-232 device. It is DB-9 to 8-pin
mini-DIN and is used with VSX 5000, VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, and
VSX 7000s systems. The maximum approved length for this cable is 100 ft
(30 m).
Use 2457-21714-200 on page 2-34 instead, when connecting to a modem.


10 ft (3 m) 2457-09156-001 —


2 - 30

Cables

The 8-pin mini-DIN female connector on the VSX system has the following
connections.

Pin Signal

1 Not used

2 Tx (output)

3 Rx (input)

4 DSR (input)

5 GND

6 DTR (output)

7 RTS (output)

8 CTS (input)

Shield GND

7
8 6
5 3
4
2 1

2 - 31


Straight-Through Serial Cable (VSX 7000e or VSX 8000)
This cable connects a VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 to a serial device. It has a DB-9
connector on each end. The maximum approved length for this cable is 100 ft
(30 m).

Polycom does not recommend using this straight-through serial cable for RS-232
communication from a computer, Crestron system, or AMX device. Instead, for
RS-232 communication, Polycom recommends using a cross-over cable with pin 2
wired to pin 3, pin 3 wired to pin 2, and pin 5 wired to pin 5. The other pins are not
used.

If you choose to use this straight-through serial cable for RS-232 communication
from a computer or Crestron system, the null modem adapter 1517-61577-001 on
page 2-35 is required. However, the null modem adapter does not work for RS-232
communication from AMX devices and will cause problems if you try to use it.


25 ft (7.6 m) 2457-09172-001 —


2 - 32

Cables

The DB-9 male connector on the VSX system has the following connections.

Pin Signal

1 Not used

2 Rx

3 Tx

4 DTR (tied to pin 6, DSR)

5 GND

6 DSR (tied to pin 4, DTR)

7 RTS (tied to pin 8, CTS)

8 CTS (tied to pin 7, RTS)

9 Not used

Most devices which connect to the serial port to control the VSX system via the
API only require pins 2, 3, and 5. For more information and to verify the proper
cabling, refer to the documentation for your control system.

2 - 33


Null Modem Cable
This cable connects a VSX system to a null modem. It is 8-pin mini-DIN to
DB-9 and is used with VSX 5000, VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, and
VSX 7000s systems.


25 ft (7.6 m) 2457-21714-200 Yes


2 - 34

Cables

Null Modem Adapter
This adapter is used when connecting a VSX 7000e or VSX 8000 to a serial
device that transmits on pin 3 such as Crestron Pro2 processor. It is a male to
female DB-9 adapter plug. This connection may require the straight-through
serial cable (2457-09172-001) on page 2-32.

Do not use this adapter with an AMX device. AMX systems support both RS-232
and RS-422. Therefore, for RS-232 support, use a null modem cross-over cable
that carries only pins 2, 3, and 5, with pins 2 and 3 crossed.


— 1517-61577-001 Yes

DB9F DB9M
PIN 1&6 PIN 4
PIN 2 PIN 3
PIN 3 PIN 2
PIN 4 PIN 1&6
PIN 5 PIN 5
PIN 7 PIN 8
PIN 8 PIN 7
PIN 9 N/C


2 - 35


Content Sharing Cables

Visual Concert VSX Cable
This cable connects a Polycom Visual Concert VSX to a computer. It has RJ-45,
HD-15, and stereo jack connectors on both ends and is used with VSX 5000,
VSX 6000, VSX 6000A, VSX 7000, and VSX 7000s systems.


6 ft (1.8 m) 2457-10757-200 Yes


2 - 36

Cables

ImageShare II to Computer Cable
This cable connects a Polycom ImageShare™ II to a computer. It has HD-15
and stereo jack connectors on both ends and is used with VSX 7000e and
VSX 8000 systems.


3 ft (0.9 m) 185-0020-02 Yes

15 Pin High Density
D-Sub Connector 15 Pin High Density
Male with overmold D-Sub Connector
Female with
overmold
co nn ectio n

co nn ectio n
Lapto p

i-T OT
915 +/- 25 MM

3.5mm phono plug 3.5mm phono plug

wire length 153 +/- 8 MM
wire length 610 +/- 13 MM
(2X34.0)
WIRE TABLE
HD15 -M SIGNAL NAME HD15 -F WIRE TYPE WIRE COLOR
1 RED 1 A RED CENTER
(2X17.3)
2 GREEN 2 A GREEN CENTER
3 BLUE 3 A BLUE CENTER
4 TOT -DETECT 4 C ORANGE
5 GROUND 5 C GREEN
6 RED -SHIELD 6 A RED -SHIELD
END VIEW OF BOTH 15 PIN HD D-SUB CONNECTORS 7 GREEN -SHIELD 7 A GREEN -SHIELD
8 BLUE -SHIELD 8 A BLUE -SHIELD
9 N/C 9 N/C N/C
10 SYNC -RETURN 10 B BLACK -WHITE
11 N/C 11 N/C N/C
12 SDA 12 C BROWN
13 H-SYNC 13 B BLUE
14 V-SYNC 14 B RED
15 SCL 15 C YELLOW
3.5mm PLUG
TIP LEFT -AUDIO TIP A BLACK
RING RIGHT -AUDIO RING A WHITE
SLEEVE OUTER SHIELD SLEEVE A BLACK SHIELD
SLEEVE OUTER SHIELD SLEEVE A WHITE SHIELD


2 - 37


IR Connector
This connector connects the IR sensor input on a VSX 8000 to an external IR
receiver, such as Xantech models 780-80, 780-90, 480-00, and 490-90. It is a 3-pin
Phoenix connector.


— 1515-21516-003 Yes
Phoenix part number: 1952270

Top View
1
2
3

PIN #
1 +12 V
2 Ground
3 IR signal


2 - 38

3
Using the API

The Application Programming Interface (API) is a set of commands for
advanced users who want to automate a VSX system. You can use the API by
connecting a control system or computer RS-232 serial port to the VSX system.
Or, you can use Telnet over the LAN to use the API.

Using the API with an RS-232 Interface
If you use an RS-232 interface to send API commands, you must connect and
configure the control system or computer and the VSX system for serial
communication.

Configuring the RS-232 Interface
If you use the API with a serial connection, make sure that the RS-232
interfaces of the VSX system and your computer are configured appropriately.
To access the RS-232 settings on your system, select System > Admin Settings
> General Settings > Serial Port.
Configure the Baud Rate and RS-232 Mode options as follows:

Configure this way on your Configure this way on the
Option computer VSX system

Baud Rate Must be the same rate for both devices. Available rates are:
9600
14400
19200
38400
57600
115200

RS-232 Mode — Control

3-1


The RS-232 port on the VSX system supports two modes: Control and
Pass-Thru.
In Control Mode, a device (for example, a computer) connected to the RS-232
port can control the system using the API.
In Pass-Thru Mode, the operational modes of both devices’ RS-232 ports
depend on the port configuration of each device.

Starting an API Session via an RS-232 Interface
After you have verified that the VSX system and your computer are both
configured appropriately, set up both devices as follows:
1. Power off the computer and the VSX system.
2. Use an RS-232 cable to connect the control system or computer RS-232
port to an RS-232 port on the VSX system as shown in the following
illustration. This connection may require the null modem adapter
1517-61577-001 on page 2-35.

VSX 6000 or VSX 7000

RS-232 port
0101

VGA
2 2
3

1
LAN

VSX 6000A or VSX 7000s

RS-232 port 2

101010

24V 3A VGA
LAN 1

VSX 7000e or VSX 8000
90-250VAC 50/60Hz 4A
IR

3 PC CARD
1 2 VGA
VCR/DVD

2
IOIOIO
1 2 VGA LAN

RS-232 ports

3. Power on the computer and the VSX system.
4. From the computer, start a serial session using HyperTerminal or another
appropriate utility.

3-2

Using the API

Using the API with a LAN Connection
If you have a computer connected to the LAN, you can send API commands
to the VSX system via Telnet port 24.
1. On the computer, open a command line interface.
2. Start a Telnet session using the VSX system IP address and port number
— for example, telnet 10.11.12.13 24.
If the VSX system has Security Mode enabled, you must use a utility that
supports Transport Layer Security (TLS), and you must provide the
remote access password.

Using the API Controller Code
In cooperation with the leading touch panel controller manufacturers,
Polycom Video Division is proud to offer its own version of controller code
designed to run on Crestron and AMX systems. This independent code base
was developed specifically to address issues of code compatibility with video
system software releases. It provides a fully executable controller program but
also serves as a guideline for ongoing development using Polycom preferred
methodology and commands.
Companion documents are also available to further explain how to interface
your controller with Polycom video systems and utilize the API efficiently.

3-3


3-4

4
System Commands

This chapter describes the API commands for software version 8.7.
For an alphabetical list of all the commands, refer to the table of contents for
this document.
For a list of all the commands by category, refer to Appendix B, Categorical
List of API Commands.
For a list of commands that are new and newly deprecated in this version, refer
to Appendix D, API Changes in This Version.

4-1


About the API Commands

Syntax Conventions
The following conventions are used for the API command descriptions in this
chapter. All of the commands are case sensitive.

Convention Meaning

<param1|param2|param3> Multiple valid parameters are enclosed in angle brackets and separated by
the pipe (“|”) character.
Example: allowdialing <yes|no|get> shows that the allowdialing
command must be followed by one of the parameters listed.

[param] Optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets. Quotation marks
[“param”] indicate strings to be supplied by the user.
Example: teleareacode set ["telephone_area_code"] shows that you
can supply a value for the area code, or omit it and let the default value
apply. You do not need to enclose the actual value in quotes unless it
contains a space.

{a..z} A range of possible alphanumeric values is enclosed in braces.
Example: abk letter {a..z} shows that the abk command can be used
to return address book entries that begin with an alphanumeric character in
the range specified.
Example: camera near {1..4} shows that the camera command can be
used to select camera 1, 2, 3, or 4 at the near site.

“x” Quotation marks indicate strings to be supplied by the user. You do not
need to enclose the value in quotes unless it contains a space.

Although the API command parser may accept the minimum number of
characters in a command which makes it unique, you should always use the
full command string.

Availability of Commands
The availability of API commands depends on the type of system and optional
equipment installed or connected. If a particular command is not supported on
the system, the command returns feedback such as “error: this command is
not supported on this model” or “command is not available in current
system configuration”.
Deprecated commands are included for backward compatibility only and are
not recommended for use with this version. Suitable replacements are noted
for each deprecated command.

4-2

System Commands

!
Executes a previously used command from the history list, starting with a
specific number or letter.

Syntax
!“string”
!{1..64}

Parameter Description

“string” Specifies the most recent command from the history list
that begins with this string.

{1..64} Specifies the Nth command in the history list, where N
is 1 through 64.

Feedback Examples
Assume the following command history.
• gatewaynumber set 123456789
returns
gatewaynumber 123456789

• hangup video
returns
hanging up video call

• history
returns
1 gatewaynumber set 123456789
2 hangup video

• h323name get
returns
h323name testip
In this case, each of the following !<letter or number> commands executes
the command and prints its output from the history list, as follows.

• !1
returns
gatewaynumber set 123456789

• !2
returns
hangup video

4-3


• !h
returns
h323name get
h323name testip

• history
returns
2 hangup video
3 h323name get
5 hangup video
6 h323name get

See Also
For information about the history list, refer to the history command on
page 4-140.

4-4

System Commands

abk
Returns local directory (address book) entries.

Syntax
abk all
abk batch {0..59}
abk batch search “pattern” “count”
abk batch define “start_no” “stop_no”
abk letter {a..z}
abk range “start_no” “stop_no“
abk refresh


all Returns all the records in the local directory.

batch Returns a batch of 10 local directory entries. Requires
a batch number, which must be an integer in the range
{0..59}. Batches should be requested sequentially to
ensure receiving a complete list of entries.

search Specifies a batch search.

“pattern” Specifies pattern to match for the batch search.

“count” Specifies the number of entries to list that match the
pattern.

define Returns a batch of entries in the range defined by
“start_no” to “stop_no.” Deprecated. Polycom
recommends using abk range instead of this
command.

“start_no” Specifies the beginning of the range of entries to return.

“stop_no” Specifies the end of the range of entries to return.

letter Returns entries beginning with the letter specified from
the range {a..z}. Requires one or two alphanumeric
characters. Valid characters are:
- _ / ; @ , .
0 through 9
a through z

range Returns local directory entries numbered “start_no”
through “stop_no”. Requires two integers.

refresh Refreshes the local directory entries cache.

4-5


Feedback Examples

• abk range 6 9
returns
abk 6. 192.168.1.107 spd:128 num:192.168.1.107
abk 7. Polycom Austin Stereo spd:384 num:1.512.6977918
abk 7. Polycom Austin Stereo spd:384 num:stereo.polycom.com
abk 8. Polycom HDX Demo spd:384 num:1.700.5551212
abk 9. Polycom VSX Demo spd:2x64 num:1.700.5552323

• abk letter p
returns

• abk batch 0
returns
abk 0. 192.168.1.101 spd:128 num:192.168.1.101
abk 1. 192.168.1.102 spd:128 num:192.168.1.102
abk 2. 192.168.1.103 spd:128 num:192.168.1.103
abk 3. 192.168.1.104 spd:128 num:192.168.1.104
abk 4. 192.168.1.105 spd:128 num:192.168.1.105
abk 5. 192.168.1.106 spd:128 num:192.168.1.106
abk 6. 192.168.1.107 spd:128 num:192.168.1.107
abk 7. Polycom Austin Stereo spd:384 num:1.512.6977918
abk 7. Polycom Austin Stereo spd:384 num:stereo.polycom.com

Note: Entries with multiple addresses (for example, IP address and ISDN
number) return each address type on separate lines with the same record
number.

Comments
abk entries are entries stored on the system. gabk entries are entries stored on
the GDS. In the user interface, the address book and global address book
features are referred to as directory and global directory.
User interface screen location: Directory > Search button or alphabet tabs

4-6

System Commands

addressdisplayedingab
Specifies whether to make the system address public or private in the global
directory.

Syntax
addressdisplayedingab get
addressdisplayedingab private
addressdisplayedingab public


get Returns the current setting.

private Specifies not to display the system address in the
global directory.

public Displays the system address in the global directory.

Feedback Examples

• addressdisplayedingab private
returns
addressdisplayedingab private

• addressdisplayedingab public
returns

• addressdisplayedingab get
returns

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Global Services >
Directory Servers: Display Name in Global Directory

4-7


adminpassword
Sets or gets the remote access password. This command is not supported on
the serial port.

Syntax
adminpassword get
adminpassword set [“password”]


get Returns the current remote access password.

set Sets the password used for remote management of the
system if followed by the password parameter. To
erase the current setting, omit the password parameter.

“password” User-defined password. Valid characters are: a through
z (lower and uppercase), -, _, @, /, ;, ,, ., , 0
through 9. The password cannot include spaces.

Feedback Examples

• adminpassword set Mypsswd
returns
adminpassword Mypsswd

• adminpassword set “Mypsswd”
returns
adminpassword Mypsswd

• adminpassword set “My psswd”
returns
error: command has illegal parameters

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > General Settings
> Security: Remote Access

4-8

System Commands

advnetstats
Gets advanced network statistics for a call connection.

Syntax
advnetstats [{0..n}]


{0..n} Specifies a connection in a multipoint call, where n is
the maximum number of connections supported by the
system. 0 is call #1, 1 is call #2, 2 is call #3, and so on.
Select a number from this range to specify a remote
site call for which you want to obtain advanced network
statistics.
Omit this parameter when retrieving statistics for a
point-to-point call.

Feedback Examples

• advnetstats 1
returns
call:1 tar:24k rar:24k tvr:64.3k rvr:104k
tvru:63.8k rvru:114.6k tvfr:15.0 rvfr:15.0 vfe ---
tapl:66 rapl:0 taj:46mS raj:40mS tvpl:122 rvpl:0
tvj:21mS rvj:60mS dc:--- rsid:Polycom_4.2

• Returned parameters are:
tar=Transmit audio rate
rar=Receive audio rate
tvr=Transmit video rate
rvr=Receive video rate
tvru=Transmit video rate used
rvru=Receive video rate used
tvfr=Transmit video frame rate
rvfr=Receive video frame rate
vfe=Video FEC errors
tapl=Transmit audio packet loss (H.323 calls only)
tlsdp=Transmit LSD protocol (H.320 calls only)
rapl=Receive audio packet loss (H.323 calls only)
rlsdp=Receive LSD protocol (H.320 calls only)
taj=Transmit audio jitter (h.323 calls only)
tlsdr=Transmit LSD rate (H.320 calls only)
raj=Receive audio jitter (H.323 calls only)
rlsd=Receive LSD rate (H.320 calls only)
tvpl=Transmit video packet loss (H.323 calls only)
tmlpp=Transmit MLP protocol (H.320 calls only)
rvpl=Receive video packet loss (H.323 calls only)
rmlpp=Receive MLP protocol (H.320 calls only)
tvj=Transmit video jitter (H.323 calls only)

4-9


tmlpr=Transmit MLP rate (H.320 calls only)
rvj=Receive video jitter (H.323 calls only)
rmlpr=Receive MLP rate (H.320 calls only)
dc=Data conference
rsid=Remote system id

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Call Statistics

4 - 10

System Commands

alertusertone
Sets or gets the tone used for user alerts.

Syntax
alertusertone <get|1|2|3|4>



1|2|3|4 Sets the user alert to the corresponding tone.

Feedback Examples

• alertusertone 1
returns
alertusertone 1

• alertusertone get
returns
alertusertone 1

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Audio: User Alert
Tones

4 - 11


alertvideotone
Sets the tone used for incoming video calls.

Syntax
alertvideotone <get|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10>



1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10 Sets the incoming video alert to the corresponding
tone.

Feedback Examples

• alertvideotone 1
returns
alertvideotone 1

• alertvideotone get
returns
alertvideotone 1

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Audio: Incoming
Video Call

4 - 12

System Commands

all register
Registers for most commonly-used user registration events.

Syntax
all register

Feedback Examples
• all register
returns
callstate registered
camera registered
chaircontrol registered
linestate registered
mute registered
pip registered
popupinfo registered
preset registered
screen registered
vcbutton registered
volume registered
sleep registered

Comments
Registers changes to any of the following types of parameters:
• Current near-site or far-site source
• State of privacy
• Current volume level
• Active camera presets
• Status of point-to-point or multipoint calls
• Status of physical ISDN/IP connection to codec
• PIP state
• Visual Concert state
• Chair control
• System information
• Gatekeeper status

This command is particularly useful when two different control systems are
being used simultaneously, such as the web and API commands. The system
maintains the registration changes through restarts.
To register for events not included in this feedback, refer to the specific
registration command.

See Also
The registerall command on page 4-222 is an alias for this command.
To unregister user feedback, use the all unregister command on page 4-14
or the unregisterall command on page 4-281.

4 - 13


all unregister
Simultaneously unregisters all registered user feedback so that the API no
longer reports changes to the parameters.

Syntax
all unregister

Feedback Examples
• all register
returns
callstate unregistered
camera unregistered
linestate unregistered
mute unregistered
pip unregistered
popupinfo unregistered
preset unregistered
screen unregistered
vcbutton unregistered
volume unregistered
sleep unregistered
configchange unregistered

Comments
The following types of parameters are unregistered:
• Current near-site or far-site source
• State of privacy
• Current volume level
• Active camera presets
• Status of point-to-point or multipoint calls
• Status of physical ISDN/IP connection to codec
• PIP state
• Visual Concert state
• Chair control
• System information
• Gatekeeper status

See Also
The unregisterall command on page 4-281 is an alias for this command.
To register for user feedback, use the all register command on page 4-13 or
the registerall command on page 4-222.

4 - 14

System Commands

allowabkchanges
Sets or gets the Allow Directory Changes setting.

Syntax
allowabkchanges <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the Allow Directory Changes setting.

no Disables the Allow Directory Changes setting.

Feedback Examples

• allowabkchanges no
returns
allowabkchanges no

• allowabkchanges yes
returns
allowabkchanges yes

• allowabkchanges get
returns
allowabkchanges yes

Comments
If this option is enabled, the user has access to the New, Edit, and Delete
operations in the directory.
> System Settings > Directory: Allow Directory Changes

4 - 15


allowcamerapresetssetup
Sets or gets whether users are allowed to change camera presets.

Syntax
allowcamerapresetssetup <get|yes|no>



yes Allows users to change camera presets.

no Prevents users from changing camera presets.

Feedback Examples

• allowcamerapresetssetup no
returns
allowcamerapresetssetup no

• allowcamerapresetssetup yes
returns
allowcamerapresetssetup yes

• allowcamerapresetssetup get
returns
allowcamerapresetssetup yes

4 - 16

System Commands

allowdialing
Sets or gets the ability to dial out from the system.

Syntax
allowdialing <get|yes|no>



yes Allows users to place calls.

no Disables dialing so that the system can only receive
calls.

Feedback Examples

• allowdialing no
returns
allowdialing no

• allowdialing yes
returns
allowdialing yes

• allowdialing get
returns
allowdialing yes

Comments
allowdialing no removes the dialing field and marquee text from the home
screen.
> Home Screen Settings: Dialing Display

See Also
The ability to place calls is also controlled by the dialingdisplay command
on page 4-71 and dialingentryfield command on page 4-72.

4 - 17


allowmixedcalls
Sets or gets the ability to place and receive mixed protocol multipoint calls (IP
and ISDN). It allows the administrator to disable this ability for security
reasons.

Syntax
allowmixedcalls <get|yes|no>



yes Enables mixed IP and ISDN calls.

no Disables mixed IP and ISDN calls.

Feedback Examples

• allowmixedcalls no
returns
allowmixedcalls no

• allowmixedcalls yes
returns
allowmixedcalls yes

• allowmixedcalls get
returns
allowmixedcalls yes

Comments
This option is only visible on screen if ISDN and IP have both been enabled on
the Call Preference screen.
> System Settings > Call Settings: Allow Mixed IP and ISDN Calls

4 - 18

System Commands

allowstreaming
Adds or removes Streaming on the Utilities screen, which allows users to start
streaming calls.

Syntax
allowstreaming <get|yes|no>



yes Allows users to stream calls.

no Does not allow users to stream calls.

Feedback Examples

• allowstreaming no
returns
allowstreaming no

• allowstreaming yes
returns
allowstreaming yes

• allowstreaming get
returns
allowstreaming yes

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Network > IP >
Streaming: Allow Streaming

4 - 19


allowusersetup
Adds or removes the User Settings icon on the System screen, which allows
users to access the User Settings screen.

Syntax
allowusersetup <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the User Settings icon.

no Disables the User Settings icon.

Feedback Examples

• allowusersetup no
returns
allowusersetup no

• allowusersetup yes
returns
allowusersetup yes

• allowusersetup get
returns
allowusersetup yes

Comments
This command is useful to prevent users from changing the user settings.
> Security (page 2): Allow Access to User Settings

4 - 20

System Commands

answer
Answers incoming video or analog phone calls.

Syntax
answer <video|phone>


video Answers incoming video calls when Auto Answer Point
to Point or Auto Answer Multipoint is set to No.

phone Answers incoming analog phone calls.

Feedback Examples

• answer video
returns
answer incoming video call failed

• answer video
returns
answer incoming video call passed

• answer phone
returns
answer incoming phone call failed

• answer phone
returns
answer incoming phone call passed

4 - 21


areacode
Sets or gets the area code for all ISDN BRI lines. This command is only
applicable if you have a BRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
areacode get
areacode set “areacode”


get Returns the area code information.

set Sets the ISDN BRI area code when followed by the
area code parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“areacode”.

“areacode” Area code to use for all BRI lines.

Feedback Examples

• areacode set 212
returns
areacode 212

• areacode get
returns
areacode 212

Comments
This area code is associated with the area where the system is used.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Network > ISDN
(page 2): Area Code (for Line 1, Line 2, Line 3, and Line 4)

4 - 22

System Commands

audiometer
Queries and displays levels and peak of audio inputs, 10 times per second.

Syntax
audiometer
<micpod|farin|linein|lineinred|lineinwhite|balancedin|visualconcert|
vcr|aux|off>


micpod Measures the audio strength from microphone(s).

farin Measures the strength of far-site audio.

linein Measures the audio strength of any device connection
to the white (left) audio line.

lineinred Measures the audio strength of any device connection
to the red (right) audio line.

lineinwhite Measures the audio strength of any device connection
to the white (left) audio line.

balancedin Measures the audio strength of any device connection
to the balanced in connectors on a VSX 8000.

visualconcert Measures the strength of Visual Concert VSX audio.

vcr Measures the strength of VCR audio.

aux Measures the strength of aux audio.

off Turns off audiometer output.

Feedback Examples

• audiometer farin
returns
audiometer farin level:-20 peak:-20
audiometer farin level:1 peak:1
and so on until you enter
audiometer off

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Audio > Audio Meter

4 - 23


audiotransmitlevel
Sets or gets the audio volume transmitted to the far site, or notification of
transmit level changes. This command is used when a control system needs to
increase the audio gain level of DTMF tones being sent to a gateway.

Syntax
audiotransmitlevel <get|up|down|register|unregister>
audiotransmitlevel set {-20..30}



up Sets the volume 1 decibel higher than the current
setting.

down Sets the volume 1 decibel lower than the current
setting.

register Registers to receive notification when audio transmit
level changes.

unregister Unregisters to receive notification when audio transmit
level changes.

set Sets the volume to the specified dB level. Valid values
are: {-20..30}.

Feedback Examples

• audiotransmitlevel set 2
returns
audiotransmitlevel 2

• audiotransmitlevel get
returns

• audiotransmitlevel up
returns

• audiotransmitlevel down
returns

• audiotransmitlevel register
returns
audiotransmitlevel registered

• audiotransmitlevel unregister
returns
audiotransmitlevel unregistered

4 - 24

System Commands

autoanswer
Sets or gets the Auto Answer Point to Point mode, which determines how the
system will handle an incoming call in a point-to-point video conference.

Syntax
autoanswer <get|yes|no|donotdisturb>


yes Allows any incoming video call to be connected
automatically. This is the default setting.

no Prompts the user to answer incoming video calls.

donotdisturb Notifies the user of incoming calls, but does not
connect the call. The site that placed the call receives a
Far Site Busy (H.320) or Call Rejected (H.323) code.


Feedback Examples

• autoanswer yes
returns
autoanswer yes

• autoanswer no
returns
autoanswer no

• autoanswer get
returns
autoanswer no

• autoanswer donotdisturb
returns
autoanswer donotdisturb

Comments
> System Settings > Call Settings: Auto Answer Point to Point
If autoanswer is set to no or donotdisturb, you must rely on API session
notifications to answer inbound calls.

4 - 25


autoshowcontent
Specifies whether to send content automatically when the computer is
connected to the Visual Concert VSX or ImageShare II.

Syntax
autoshowcontent <get|on|off|nearfar|nearonly>



on Sets the system to send content automatically when a
computer is connected to the system.

off Requires presenters to press the Play button on the
Visual Concert VSX or ImageShare II to send content
to the far sites.

nearfar Sets the system to send content automatically when a
computer is connected to the system. Returns
autoshowcontent on.

nearonly Sets the system to send content automatically when a
computer is connected to the system. Returns
autoshowcontent on.

Feedback Examples

• autoshowcontent on
returns
autoshowcontent on

• autoshowcontent off
returns
autoshowcontent off

• autoshowcontent get
returns
autoshowcontent off

• autoshowcontent nearfar
returns
autoshowcontent on

• autoshowcontent nearonly
returns
autoshowcontent on

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Monitors >
Graphics VGA: Send Content When PC Connects

4 - 26

System Commands

backlightcompensation
Sets or gets the Backlight Compensation mode.

Syntax
backlightcompensation <get|yes|no>



yes Enables Backlight Compensation. The camera
automatically adjusts for a bright background.

no Disables the option.

Feedback Examples

• backlightcompensation yes
returns
backlightcompensation yes

• backlightcompensation no
returns
backlightcompensation no

• backlightcompensation get
returns

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Cameras:
Backlight Compensation

4 - 27


basicmode
Sets or gets the Basic Mode configuration, a limited operating mode that uses
H.261 for video and G.711 for audio. Basic mode provides administrators with
a workaround for interoperability issues that cannot be solved using other
methods.

Syntax
basicmode <get|on|off>



on Enables basic mode.

off Disables basic mode.

Feedback Examples

• basicmode on
returns
basicmode on

• basicmode off
returns
basicmode off

• basicmode get
returns
basicmode off

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Network > Call
Preference: Enable Basic Mode

4 - 28

System Commands

bri1enable, bri2enable, bri3enable, bri4enable
Sets or gets the configuration of the specified ISDN BRI line. This command is
only applicable if you have a BRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
bri1enable <get|yes|no>


get Returns the status of the BRI line—yes if enabled, no if
disabled.

yes Enables the BRI line.

no Disables the BRI line.

Feedback Examples

• bri1enable yes
returns
bri1enable yes

• bri1enable no
returns
bri1enable no

• bri1enable get
returns
bri1enable no

Comments
(page 2): Enable (for each line)

4 - 29


briallenable
Sets or gets the configuration of all ISDN BRI lines. This command is only
applicable if you have a BRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
briallenable <get|yes|no>


get Returns the status of all BRI lines—yes if enabled, no if
disabled.

yes Enables all BRI lines.

no Disables all BRI lines.

Feedback Examples

• briallenable yes
returns
bri1enable yes
bri2enable yes
bri3enable yes
bri4enable yes

• briallenable no
returns
bri1enable no
bri2enable no
bri3enable no
bri4enable no

• briallenable get
returns
bri1enable no
bri2enable no
bri3enable no
bri4enable no

Comments
briallenable yes only enables lines where the directory numbers have been
populated.
(page 2): Enable (for Line 1, Line 2, Line 3, and Line 4)

4 - 30

System Commands

button
Simulates Polycom remote control buttons.

Syntax
button <#|*|0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|.>
button <down|left|right|select|up>
button <auto|callhangup|far|graphics|near|zoom+|zoom->
button <help|mute|snapshot|volume+|volume-|lowbattery>
button <pickedup|putdown>
button <camera|delete|directory|home|keyboard|period|pip|preset>
button <info|menu|slides>
button “valid_button” [“valid_button” ...]


. Types a period (dot) if the cursor is on a text field.

# Sends the # button signal to the user interface.

* Sends the * button signal to the user interface.

[“valid_button” ...] Sends one or more remote control button signals.

0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9 Sends the corresponding numeric button signal to the
user interface.

auto Sends the Auto button signal to the user interface.

back Simulates the Back button on multiple-page screens.

callhangup Sends the call Hang-Up button signal to the user
interface.

camera Sends the Camera button signal to the user interface.

delete Sends the Delete button signal to the user interface.

directory Sends the Directory button signal to the user interface.

down Sends the down arrow button signal to the user
interface.

far Sends the Far button signal to the user interface.

graphics Sends the Graphics button signal to the user interface.

help Sends the Help button signal to the user interface.

home Sends the Home button signal to the user interface.

info Sends the Info button signal to legacy systems.
Deprecated. Polycom recommends using help instead
of this button.

keyboard Brings up the on-screen keyboard if the cursor is on a
text field.

4 - 31



left Sends the left arrow button signal to the user interface.

lowbattery Simulates a low battery alert for the remote control.

menu Sends the Menu button signal to legacy systems.
Deprecated. Polycom recommends using back instead
of this button.

mute Sends the Mute button signal to the user interface,
causing a toggle of mute state.

near Sends the Near button signal to the user interface.

period Types a period (dot) if the cursor is on a text field.

pickedup Sends a signal indicating that the remote control has
been picked up (remote control feet are out).

pip Sends the PIP button signal to the user interface.

preset Sends the Preset button signal to the user interface.

putdown Sends signal indicating that the remote control has
been set down (remote control feet are pushed in).

right Sends the right arrow button signal to the user
interface.

select Sends the Select (center button) button signal to the
user interface.

slides Sends the Slides button signal to legacy systems.
Deprecated. Polycom recommends using graphics
instead of this button.

snapshot Sends the Snapshot button signal to the user interface

up Sends the up arrow button signal to the user interface.

volume- Sends the volume - button signal to the user interface.

volume+ Sends the volume + button signal to the user interface.

zoom- Sends the zoom - button signal to the user interface.

zoom+ Sends the zoom +button signal to the user interface.

Feedback Examples

• button up
sends the up arrow command to the user interface and returns
button up

4 - 32

System Commands

• button near left right callhangup
is valid, sends the near, left arrow, right arrow, and call hang-up
commands to the user interface, and returns
button near
button left
button right
button callhangup

The command checks for invalid input and reports button responses as they
are processed. One of three status values is returned when the command is
issued for multiple buttons:

• succeeded—all buttons are valid

• failed—all input is invalid and none can perform a valid action

• completed—some are invalid, and responses specify each as valid or
invalid

For example:
• button camera right center select
returns
button camera
button right
error: button center not a recognized command
button select
button completed

Long button command sequences will complete before a second command is
considered. Feedback for button command sequences that include multiple
buttons show only the first button name.

Comments
Note that several parameters can be combined in the same command in any
order.
The button commands are not recommended. When possible, use another API
command instead of the button commands, which rely on the current
organization of the user interface. For example, you can use the pip command
instead of button pip.

See Also
For information about the IR signals to use when programming non-Polycom
remote control devices for systems, refer to Appendix F, IR Codes for
Non-Polycom Remotes.

4 - 33


calldetail
Displays all or Nth call detail record(s).

Syntax
calldetail <“Nth_item”|all>


Nth_item Displays the Nth call detail record.

all Displays all call detail records.

Feedback Examples

• calldetail 1
returns
1,02/Jun/2007,16:34:34,02/Jun/2007,16:34:34,0:00:00,---,”Polycom
VSX Demo”,192.168.1.101,---,h323,384Kbps,Polycom/VSX
7000/8.7,Out,2,1,---,---,---,terminal,192.168.1.101:1720,
Siren14,Siren14,H.263,CIF,CIF,Normal call clearing has
occurred.”,16,---,0.00,0.00,0.00,0.00,16.00,16,00,29,29,4.00,6.00,
19,21

Comments
User interface screen location: Recent Calls button
This button is only available if enabled on the Home Screen Settings screen.

4 - 34

System Commands

calldetailreport
Sets or gets whether to generate a report of all calls made with the system.

Syntax
calldetailreport <get|yes|no>



yes Turns on call detail reporting.

no Turns off call detail reporting.

Feedback Examples

• calldetailreport yes
returns
calldetailreport yes

• calldetailreport no
returns
calldetailreport no

• calldetailreport get
returns
calldetailreport no

Comments
calldetail no disables both the Call Detail Report and Recent Calls features.
> System Settings > Call Settings (page 2): Call Detail Report

4 - 35


callencryption (deprecated)
Sets or gets the call encryption mode. You cannot use this command while a
call is in progress.
With the implementation of the encryption command on page 4-98, this
command has been deprecated.

Syntax
callencryption <get|whenavailable|disabled>



whenavailable Use encryption when the far site is capable of
encryption.

disabled Disables call encryption.

Feedback Examples

• callencryption disabled
returns
callencryption disabled

• callencryption whenavailable
returns
callencryption whenavailable

• callencryption get
returns
callencryption whenavailable

Comments
The Encryption options are only visible on the user interface if an encryption
key has been entered.
> Security: AES Encryption

4 - 36

System Commands

callinfo
Returns information about the current call. If you are in a multipoint call, this
command returns one line for each site in the call.

Syntax
callinfo all
callinfo callid “callid”


all Returns information about each connection in the call.

callid Returns information about the connection with the
specified call ID.

Feedback Examples
The callid information is returned using the following format:

callinfo:<callid>:<Far site name>:<far site number>:<speed>:
<connection status>:<mute status>:<call direction>:<call type>

• callinfo all
returns
callinfo begin
callinfo:43:Polycom VSX Demo:192.168.1.101:384:connected:
notmuted:outgoing:videocall
callinfo:36:192.168.1.102:256:connected:muted:outgoing:videocall
callinfo end

• callinfo callid 36
returns
callinfo:36:192.168.1.102:256:connected:muted:outgoing:videocall

• callinfo all
returns
system is not in a call
when no call is currently connected

4 - 37


callpreference
Sets or gets the supported call types.

Syntax
callpreference get
callpreference <analogphone|basicmode|h239|h320|h323|isdngateway|sip|
v35|voiceoverisdn>


get Returns information about which call types are
enabled. Only call types supported by the system are
returned.

analogphone Specifies the analog phone call type.

basicmode Specifies basic mode.

h239 Specifies H.239 capability.

h320 Specifies the H.320 (ISDN) call type.

h323 Specifies the H.323 (IP) call type.

isdngateway Specifies ISDN gateway calling.

sip Specifies the SIP call type.

v35 Specifies the V.35 call type.

voiceoverisdn Specifies the Voice Over ISDN call type.

Feedback Examples

• callpreference get
returns
basicmode no
h239 yes
h323 yes
sip no
isdngateway no

• callpreference basicmode yes
returns
callpreference yes

Comments
After making a change, you are prompted to restart the system.
Preference: Enable IP H.323 and Enable ISDN H.320

4 - 38

System Commands

callstate
Sets or gets the call state notification for call state events.

Syntax
callstate <get|register|unregister>



register Registers the system to give notification of call
activities.

unregister Disables the register mode.

Feedback Examples

• callstate register
returns

• callstate unregister
returns

• callstate get
returns

After registering, the callstate (cs:) data is returned as follows:
cs: call[0] chan[0] dialstr[IP:192.168.1.103] state [RINGING]
cs: call[0] chan[0] dialstr[IP:192.168.1.103] state [RINGING]
cs: call[0] chan[0] dialstr[IP:192.168.1.103] state [CONNECTED]
cs: call[0] chan[0] dialstr[IP:192.168.1.103] state [COMPLETE]
active: call[0] speed[128]
cleared: call[0] line[0] bchan[0] cause[16]
dialstr[IP:192.168.1.103]
ended: call[0]

See Also
Polycom recommends using the notify command on page 4-187 and
nonotify command on page 4-186 instead of callstate register and
callstate unregister as those notifications are easy to parse.
For more information about call status messages, refer to Appendix E, Status
Messages.

4 - 39


callstats
Returns call summary information.

Syntax
callstats

Feedback Examples

• callstats
returns
timeinlastcall 0:02:35
totalnumberofcalls 23
totalnumberofipcalls 23
totaltimeipcalls 2:08:44
percentageipcalls 100%
totalnumberofisdncalls 0
totaltimeisdncalls 00:00:00
percentageisdncalls 0%

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Call Statistics (page 5)

4 - 40

System Commands

camera
Sets or gets the near-site or far-site camera settings.

Syntax
camera near {1..4}
camera far {1..5}
camera <near|far> move <left|right|up|down|zoom+|zoom-|stop>
camera <near|far> move <continuous|discrete>
camera <near|far> source
camera <near|far> stop
camera <near|far> tracking <get|on|off|to_presets>
camera near <getposition|setposition “x” “y” “z”>
camera <register|unregister>
camera register get


near Specifies that the command selects or controls the near
camera.

far Specifies that the command selects or controls the far
camera.

{1..4}, {1..5} Specifies a near or far camera as the main video
source.

move Changes the near or far camera’s direction or zoom.
Only continuous and discrete return feedback. Valid
directions are: left, right, up, down, zoom+, zoom-,
stop, continuous, and discrete.

left Starts moving the camera left.

right Starts moving the camera right.

up Starts moving the camera up.

down Starts moving the camera down.

zoom+ Starts zooming in.

zoom- Starts zooming out.

stop Stops the near or far camera when in continuous mode.
Returns no feedback.

continuous Selects continuous movement mode. The camera will
move in direction specified until a camera <near|far>
move stop command is sent.

discrete Selects discrete movement mode. The camera will
move a small amount in the direction specified and
then stop. No stop command is required.

source Returns the number of the near or far camera source
currently selected.

4 - 41



tracking Sets the tracking mode. Returns the current near or far
camera tracking mode when followed by the get
parameter.

on Turns on the near or far camera tracking mode. The
far-site system must have the option Far Control of
Near Camera enabled and auto-tracking turned on.

off Turns off the near or far camera tracking mode.

to_presets Turns on the near or far camera tracking to presets.

getposition Gets the pan, tilt, and zoom coordinates of the currently
selected PTZ camera in the format of pan tilt zoom.

setposition “x” “y” Sets the pan (x), tilt (y), and zoom (z) coordinates of
“z” the currently selected PTZ camera. Camera PTZ
range:
-880 <= pan <= 880
-300 <= tilt <= 300
0 <= zoom <= 1023
Note: Some D30 cameras might not be able to reach
the designed range limit. For example, although the
pan limit is 880, the camera might only be able to reach
860.

register Registers to receive feedback when the user changes
the camera source. Returns the current camera
registration state when followed by the get parameter.

unregister Unregisters to receive feedback when the user
changes the camera source.

Feedback Examples

• camera far 2
specifies camera 2 at the far-site and returns
camera far 2

• camera far move left
causes the far-site camera to start panning to the left and returns
event: camera far move left

• camera near move zoom+
causes the near-site camera to zoom in and returns
event: camera near move zoom+

• camera register
returns
camera registered

4 - 42

System Commands

• camera unregister
returns
camera unregistered

• backlightcompensation no
returns

• backlightcompensation get
returns

• camera near tracking off
returns
camera near tracking off

• camera near tracking to_presets
returns
camera near tracking to_presets

4 - 43


cameradirection
Sets or gets the camera pan direction.

Syntax
cameradirection <get|normal|reversed>



normal Sets the direction of the camera to normal; the camera
moves in the same direction as the left/right arrows on
the remote control.

reversed Sets the direction of the camera to reversed; the
camera moves in the opposite direction of the left/right
arrows on the remote control.

Feedback Examples

• cameradirection normal
returns
cameradirection normal

• cameradirection reversed
returns
cameradirection reversed

• cameradirection get
returns
cameradirection reversed

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Cameras: Camera
Direction

4 - 44

System Commands

camerainput
Sets or gets the format for a video source.

Syntax
camerainput <1|2|3> <get|s-video|composite>


<1..3> Specifies the video source.


s-video Specifies that the video source is connected using
S-Video.

composite Specifies that the video source is connected using a
composite connector.

Feedback Examples

• camerainput 1 composite
returns
camerainput 1 component

• camerainput 2 s-video
returns
camerainput 2 s-video

• camerainput 2 get
returns
camerainput 2 s-video

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Cameras (page 2):
Source

4 - 45


chaircontrol
Sends various chair control commands while the system is in a multipoint call.

Syntax
chaircontrol end_conf
chaircontrol hangup_term “term_no”
chaircontrol list
chaircontrol rel_chair
chaircontrol <register|unregister>
chaircontrol req_chair
chaircontrol req_floor
chaircontrol req_term_name “term_no”
chaircontrol req_vas
chaircontrol set_broadcaster “term_no”
chaircontrol set_password “string”
chaircontrol set_term_name “term_no” “term_name”
chaircontrol stop_view
chaircontrol view “term_no”
chaircontrol view_broadcaster


end_conf Ends the call and returns the same feedback as
hangup_term for each site in the call.

hangup_term Disconnects the specified site from the call.
“term_no”

list Lists the sites in the call.

rel_chair Releases the chair.

register Registers to receive feedback on all chair control
operations.

unregister Unregisters (stops feedback on all chair control
operations).

req_chair Requests the chair.

req_floor Requests the floor.

req_term_name Requests the name for the specified terminal number.
“term_no”

req_vas Requests voice-activated switching.

set_broadcaster Requests the specified terminal to become the
“term_no” broadcaster.

set_password Sets the chaircontrol password. This password is the
“string” Meeting Password (System > Admin Settings >
General Settings > Security: Meeting Password).

4 - 46

System Commands


set_term_name Sets the name for the specified terminal number.
“term_no”
“term_name”

stop_view Stops viewing the specified terminal.

view “term_no” Views the specified terminal.

view_broadcaster Views the broadcaster.

Feedback Examples
• chaircontrol rel_chair
returns
rel_chair & view 1.1

• chaircontrol req_vas
returns
req_vas & view 1.2

• chaircontrol view 1.3
returns
view 1.3

• chaircontrol register
returns

• chaircontrol req_floor
returns
chaircontrol req_floor not in mcu call
when no MCU call is currently connected

• chaircontrol view_broadcaster
returns
view_broadcaster

• chaircontrol hangup_term 1.4
returns
chaircontrol del_term 1.4
cleared: call[34]
dialstring[IP:192.168.1.101 NAME:Polycom VSX Demo]
ended call[34]

Comments
Terminal numbers are set by the MCU and are of the form x.y where x is the
MCU and y is the participant.
You only need to enclose a parameter in quotes if it contains a space.

4 - 47


colorbar
Turns the video diagnostics color bars on or off.

Syntax
colorbar <on|off>


on Turns on the color bar test pattern.

off Turns off the color bar test pattern.

Feedback Examples

• colorbar on
returns
colorbar on

• colorbar off
returns
colorbar off

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Video

4 - 48

System Commands

colorscheme
Sets or gets the interface color scheme of the VSX system.

Syntax
colorscheme <get|1|2|3|4|5|20>



1|2|3|4|5|20 Sets the system color scheme.
1 = Ocean Blue
2 = Wine Red
3 = Concrete Gray
4 = Midnight Gray
5 = Steel Gray
20 = ViewStation Classic

Feedback Examples

• colorscheme 4
returns
colorscheme 4

Comments
> System Settings > Appearance: Color Scheme

4 - 49


configchange (deprecated)
Sets or gets the notification state for configuration changes. This command has
been deprecated.

Syntax
configchange <get|register|unregister>



register Registers to receive notifications when configuration
variables have changed.

unregister Unregisters to receive notifications when configuration
variables have changed.

Feedback Examples

• configchange register
returns
configchange registered

• configchange unregister
returns

• configchange get
returns

4 - 50

System Commands

configdisplay
Sets or gets the video format and aspect ratio for Monitor 1 or Monitor 2.

Syntax
configdisplay get
configdisplay <monitor1|monitor2> get
configdisplay <monitor1|monitor2> <s_video|composite|vga> <4:3|16:9>
configdisplay monitor2 off



monitor1 Specifies Monitor 1.

monitor2 Specifies Monitor 2.

s_video Sets the specified display to S-Video format.

composite Sets the specified display to Composite format.

vga Sets the specified display to VGA format.

4:3 Sets the display aspect ratio to 4:3 (standard).

16:9 Sets the display aspect ratio to 16:9 (wide screen).

off Sets Monitor 2 to off.

Feedback Examples
• configdisplay get
returns
configdisplay monitor1 composite 4:3, monitor2 s_video off

• configdisplay monitor1 get
returns
configdisplay monitor1 composite 4:3

• configdisplay monitor1 vga 16:9
returns
configdisplay monitor1 vga 16:9
and restarts the system

Comments
Changing from S-Video or composite to VGA, or from VGA to S-Video or
composite causes the system to restart. If Monitor 1 is set to VGA, Monitor 2 is
disabled.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Monitors

4 - 51


configparam
Sets or gets the value of many different configuration settings.

Syntax
configparam <“parameter”> get
configparam <“parameter”> set <“value”>

Parameter Possible Values Description

allow_directory_changes yes|no Sets or gets whether users can
save changes they make to the
directory.

area_code_required yes|no Sets or gets whether an area
code is required to place ISDN
calls in the specified country.

audio_in_level 0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9|10 Sets or gets the volume level of
the audio input.

balanced_input_type line_input|microphone Sets or gets the type of
equipment that is connected to
the balanced audio inputs.

balanced_output_mode variable|fixed Sets or gets whether the volume
for a device connected to the
balanced audio output
connectors is variable or fixed.

camera_video_quality motion|sharpness Sets or gets the video quality
<1|2|3|4> setting for the specified video
input for motion or for sharpness
(for images without motion).

camera1_video_quality motion|sharpness Sets or gets the video quality
setting for video input 1 for
motion or for sharpness (for
images without motion).




4 - 52

System Commands


contactlist_as_homescreen yes|no Sets or gets whether to display
the contact list home screen.

date_format mm_dd_yyyy|dd_mm_yyyy|yyyy_mm_dd Sets or gets the format for the
date display.

displaylastnumberdialed yes|no Sets or gets whether to display
the last number dialed or clear
the dialing field on the home
screen.

do_not_disturb yes|no Sets or gets whether the system
refuses incoming calls
automatically.

enable_analog_phone yes|no Sets or gets whether to allow the
system to make voice-only calls
to any phone using an analog
phone line.

enable_ftp_access yes|no Sets or gets whether to allow
remote access to the system by
FTP.

enable_isdn_gateway yes|no Sets or gets whether to place
IP-to-ISDN calls through a
gateway.

enable_polycom_mic yes|no Sets or gets whether integrated
and attached Polycom
microphones are enabled.

enable_polycom_stereo yes|no Sets or gets whether Polycom
StereoSurround™ is used for all
calls.

enable_sip yes|no Sets or gets whether to allow the
system to use SIP when
connecting IP calls.

enable_telnet_access yes|no Sets or gets whether to allow
Telnet.

enable_web_access yes|no Sets or gets whether to allow
the web.

firewall_fixed_ports yes|no Sets or gets whether to define
the TCP and UDP firewall ports.

ip_max_incoming_speed 128|256|384|512|768|1024|1472|1920 Sets or gets the maximum speed
for an incoming IP call.

4 - 53



line_input_red vcr|vcnx Sets or gets whether a VCR or
an ImageShare II, Visual
Concert VSX, or laptop is
connected to the red (right)
audio line in.

line_input_white vcr|vcnx Sets or gets whether a VCR or
an ImageShare II, Visual
Concert VSX, or laptop is
connected to the white (left)
audio line in.

line_output_mode variable|fixed Sets or gets the audio output
mode.

mainscreensites yes|no Sets or gets whether the main
monitor displays the call sites.

preferred_dialing_method auto|manual Sets or gets the preferred
method for dialing various call
types.

remote_control_keypad presets|tones Sets or gets whether pressing
remote control keypad buttons
moves the camera to presets or
generates DTMF tones.

sites_button_name speed_dial|buddy_list Sets or gets whether the button
text for pre-defined sites on the
home screen is displayed as
Speed Dial or the site name.

snap_button_option calendar|callhistory| Sets or gets the use for the Snap
systeminformation|callstatistics| button on the remote control.
off

use_non-polycom_remote yes|no Sets or gets whether the system
accepts input from a
programmable, non-Polycom
remote control.

video_pro-motion auto|off|512|768|1024 Sets or gets Pro-Motion™
minimum call speed settings for
video inputs that are set for
motion.

Feedback Examples
• configparam allow_directory_changes get
returns
allow_directory_changes yes

4 - 54

System Commands

• configparam audio_in_level set 4
returns
audio_in_level 4

• configparam camera_video_quality 1 set motion
returns
camera1_video_quality motion

• configparam camera1_video_quality set motion
returns
camera1_video_quality motion

• configparam date_format set mm_dd_yyyy
returns
date_format mm_dd_yyyy

• configparam ip_max_incoming_speed set 384
returns
ip_max_incoming_speed 384

• configparam line_input_red set vcnx
returns
line_input_red vcnx
and sets the red line input to the Visual Concert VSX
• configparam mainscreensites set no
returns
mainscreensites no

• configparam video_pro-motion get
returns
video_pro-motion 768

Comments
After using configparam enable_ftp_access,
configparam enable_telnet_access, or
configparam enable_web_access, you are prompted to restart the system.

4 - 55


configpresentation
Sets or gets the content presentation settings for Monitor 1 or Monitor 2.

Syntax
configpresentation get
configpresentation <monitor1|monitor2> get
configpresentation monitor1 <near|far|content|near-or-far|
content-or-near|content-or-far|all|none>
configpresentation monitor2 <near|far|content|near-or-far|
content-or-near|content-or-far|all|none>
configpresentation monitor1 "value" monitor2 "value"


get Returns the current settings for the active monitors.

monitor1 Specifies settings for Monitor 1.

monitor2 Specifies settings for Monitor 2.

near Selects near-site video as the video source to display
on the specified monitor.

far Selects far-site video as the video source to display on
the specified monitor.

content Selects content as the video source to display on the
specified monitor.

near-or-far Selects both near-site and far-site video as video
sources to display on the specified monitor.

content-or-near Selects both near-site video and content as video

content-or-far Selects both content and far-site video as video

all Selects content, near-site video, and far-site video as
video sources for the specified monitor.

none Clears all video sources for the specified monitor.

“value” Sets presentation mode for both monitors.

4 - 56

System Commands

Feedback Examples

• configpresentation monitor1 get
returns
configpresentation monitor1:all

• configpresentation monitor2 get
returns
configpresentation monitor2:near-or-far

• configpresentation monitor2 far
returns
error: configpresentation not applied since monitor2 is off
when monitor 2 is off

Comments
Monitors (page 2)

4 - 57


confirmdiradd
Sets or gets the configuration for prompting users to add directory entries for
the far sites when a call disconnects.

Syntax
confirmdiradd <get|yes|no>



yes When a call disconnects, the user is prompted to create
a local directory entry for the far site if it is not already
in the directory.

no The user is not prompted to create a local directory
entry after a call disconnects.

Feedback Examples

• confirmdiradd no
returns
confirmdiradd no

• confirmdiradd yes
returns
confirmdiradd yes

• confirmdiradd get
returns
confirmdiradd yes

Comments
> System Settings > Directory: Confirm Directory Additions Upon Call
Disconnect

4 - 58

System Commands

confirmdirdel
Sets or gets the configuration for requiring users to confirm directory
deletions.

Syntax
confirmdirdel <get|yes|no>



yes When deleting an entry from the directory (address
book), the user is prompted with “Are you sure you
want to delete this entry?”

no When deleting an entry from the directory (address
book), the user is not prompted with a message.

Feedback Examples

• confirmdirdel no
returns
confirmdirdel no

• confirmdirdel yes
returns
confirmdirdel yes

• confirmdirdel get
returns
confirmdirdel yes

Comments
> System Settings > Directory: Confirm Directory Deletions

4 - 59


contentauto
Sets or gets the automatic bandwidth adjustment for people and content in
point-to-point H.323 calls. Automatic adjustment maintains equal image
quality in the two streams.

Syntax
contentauto <get|on|off>



on Enables automatic bandwidth adjustment for people
and content.

off Disables automatic bandwidth adjustment for people
and content. The system Quality Preference settings
is used instead.

Feedback Examples

• contentauto off
returns
contentauto FALSE

• contentauto on
returns
contentauto TRUE

• contentauto get
returns
contentauto on

See Also
To set the bandwidth split for people and content, use the
vgaqualitypreference command on page 4-299.

4 - 60

System Commands

country
Sets or gets the country setting for the system. This allows you to specify
country-specific calling parameters for your location.

Syntax
country get
country set {afghanistan...zimbabwe}



set Sets the country. A country name parameter is
required.

{algeria...zimbabwe} Name of a country from the system’s country list. Use
quotation marks around a compound name or strings
containing spaces. Example: “united states”

Feedback Examples

• country set germany
returns
country germany

• country set “united states”
returns
country “united states”

• country get
returns
country “united states”

Comments
> Location: Country

4 - 61


cts
Sets or gets the CTS serial interface control signal (clear to send) configuration.
This command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface
connected to your system.

Syntax
cts <get|normal|inverted|ignore>



normal Sets the signal to normal (high voltage is logic 1).

inverted Sets the signal to inverted (low voltage is logic 1).

ignore Ignores the signal.

Feedback Examples

• cts normal
returns
cts normal

• cts inverted
returns
cts inverted

• cts get
returns
cts inverted

Comments
The default setting for this signal is “normal”.
H.323 Settings> V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): CTS

4 - 62

System Commands

daylightsavings
Sets or gets the daylight savings time setting. When you enable this setting, the
system clock automatically changes for daylight saving time.

Syntax
daylightsavings <get|yes|no>



yes Enables automatic adjustment for daylight savings
time.

no Disables automatic adjustment for daylight savings
time.

Feedback Examples

• daylightsavings no
returns
daylightsavings no

• daylightsavings yes
returns
daylightsavings yes

• daylightsavings get
returns
daylightsavings yes

Comments
> Location (page 2): Auto Adjust for Daylight Saving Time

4 - 63


dcd
Sets or gets the configuration for the DCD serial interface control signal (data
carrier detect). This command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network
interface connected to your system.

Syntax
dcd <get|normal|inverted>





Feedback Examples

• dcd normal
returns
dcd normal

• dcd inverted
returns
dcd inverted

• dcd get
returns
dcd inverted

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Network >
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): DCD

4 - 64

System Commands

dcdfilter
Sets or gets the filter setting of the DCD serial interface control signal (data
carrier detect). This command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network

Syntax
dcdfilter <get|on|off>



on Enables the DCD filter.

off Disables the DCD filter.

Feedback Examples

• dcdfilter on
returns
dcdfilter on

• dcdfilter off
returns
dcdfilter off

• dcdfilter get
returns
dcdfilter off

Comments
When this filter is enabled, DCD drops for 60 seconds before changing the call
state. The default setting for this signal is “off”.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): Delayed DCD hangup

4 - 65


defaultgateway
Sets or gets the default gateway.

Syntax
defaultgateway get
defaultgateway set “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”


get Returns the default gateway IP address.

set Sets the default gateway when followed by the
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” parameter.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address to use as the default gateway.

Feedback Examples

• defaultgateway set 192.168.1.101
returns
defaultgateway 192.168.1.101
restart system for changes to take effect. restart now? <y,n>

Comments
This setting can only be changed if DHCP is turned off. After making a change,
you are prompted to restart the system.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > LAN Properties
(page 2): Default Gateway

4 - 66

System Commands

dhcp
Sets or gets DHCP options.

Syntax
dhcp <get|off|client|server>


get Returns the selected DHCP option.

off Disables DHCP.

client Enables DHCP client, setting the system to obtain an
IP address from a server on your network.

server Enables DHCP server, setting the system to provide IP
addresses to the other computers on your network.

Feedback Examples

• dhcp off
returns

• dhcp client
returns

• dhcp get
returns
dhcp client

Comments
After making a change, you are prompted to restart the system. If the user or
administrator has chosen not to allow the DHCP server option, it will not be
available.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > LAN Properties:
IP Address: Obtain IP address automatically or Enter IP address manually

4 - 67


dial
Dials video or audio calls either manually or from the directory.

Syntax
dial addressbook “addr book name”
dial auto “speed” “dialstr”
dial manual <56|64> “dialstr1” “dialstr2” [h320]
dial manual “speed” “dialstr1” [“dialstr2”] [h323|h320|ip|isdn|sip]
dial phone “dialstring”


addressbook Dials a directory (address book) entry. Requires the
name of the entry.

“addr book name” The name of the directory (address book) entry. The
name may be up to 25 characters. Use quotation marks
around strings that contain spaces. For example:
“John Doe”.

auto Dials a video call number dialstr1 at speed of type h323
or h320. Requires the parameters “speed” and
“dialstr”. Allows the user to automatically dial a
number. The system first attempts H.323 and if that
fails, rolls over to H.320. Deprecated. Instead of this
command, Polycom recommends using dial manual
and not specifying a call type.

“speed” Valid data rate for the network.

“dialstr”, Valid ISDN or IP directory number.
“dialstr1”,
“dialstr2”

manual Dials a video call number dialstr1 at speed of type h323
or h320. Requires the parameters “speed” and
“dialstr1”.
Use dial manual “speed” “dialstr” “type” when
you do not want automatic call rollover or when the
dialstring might not convey the intended transport (for
example, an extension with an IP gateway might look
like an ISDN number, but in fact corresponds to an IP
address).

56|64 Specifies speed for two-channel calls.

h323|h320|ip|isdn|sip Type of call.
Note: The parameters ip and isdn are deprecated.

phone Dials an analog phone number.

“dialstring” Numeric string specifying the phone number to dial.
Enclose the string in quotation marks if it includes
spaces. Example: “512 555 1212”

4 - 68

System Commands

Feedback Examples
• dial manual 64 5551212 h320
returns
dialing manual
cs: call[34] chan[0] dialstr[5551212] state[ALLOCATED]
cs: call[34] chan[0] dialstr[5551212] state[RINGING]
cs: call[34] chan[0] dialstr[5551212] state[CONNECTED]
cs: call[34] chan[0] dialstr[5551212] state[COMPLETE]

• dial addressbook "John Polycom"
returns
dialing addressbook 29
dialing Monday meeting
cs: call[35] chan[0] dialstr[192.168.1.101] state[ALLOCATED]
cs: call[35] chan[0] dialstr[192.168.1.101] state[RINGING]
cs: call[35] chan[0] dialstr[192.168.1.101] state[CONNECTED]
cs: call[35] chan[0] dialstr[192.168.1.101] state[COMPLETE]

Comments
When searching for feedback from the dial command, expect to see the set of
described strings as many times as there are channels in the call.

See Also
Refer to the callstate command on page 4-39. You can use callstate
register to obtain updated information on the status of a call. For example,
when using the dial manual to place a call, callstate register can tell you
when the call is connected.

4 - 69


dialchannels
Sets or gets whether to dial ISDN channels in parallel. This command is only
applicable if you have an ISDN network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
dialchannels get
dialchannels set n



set Sets the number of channels to dial.

n Sets the number of channels to dial. n is 8 for QBRI, 12
for PRI.

Feedback Examples

• dialchannels set 8
returns
dialchannels 8

• dialchannels get
returns
dialchannels 8

Comments
(page 3)

4 - 70

System Commands

dialingdisplay
Sets or gets the home screen dialing display.

Syntax
dialingdisplay <get|dialingentry|displaymarquee|none>



dialingentry Displays a field for users to enter numbers manually.

displaymarquee Displays text in the dialing entry field. Users cannot
enter numbers manually when this option is selected.
The text displayed is specified by the
marqueedisplaytext command.

none Removes the dialing entry field from the display.

Feedback Examples

• dialingdisplay none
returns
dialingdisplay none

• dialingdisplay dialingentry
returns
dialingdisplay dialingentry

• dialingdisplay displaymarquee
returns
dialingdisplay displaymarquee

• dialingdisplay get
returns
dialingdisplay displaymarquee

Comments
> Home Screen Settings: Dialing Display

See Also
The text displayed is specified by the marqueedisplaytext command on
page 4-164.

4 - 71


dialingentryfield
Sets or gets the configuration of the dialing entry field on the Place a Call
screen.

Syntax
dialingentryfield <get|yes|no>



yes Adds the dialing entry field to the Place a Call screen.

no Removes the dialing entry field from the Place a Call
screen.

Feedback Examples

• dialingentryfield yes
returns
dialingentryfield yes

• dialingentryfield no
returns
dialingentryfield no

• dialingentryfield get
returns
dialingentryfield no

4 - 72

System Commands

diffservaudio, diffservfecc, diffservvideo
Sets or gets the DiffServ option and specifies a priority level for audio, far-end
camera control (FECC), and video, respectively. The priority level value for
each can be between 0 and 63.

Syntax
diffservaudio get
diffservaudio set {0..63}
diffservfecc get
diffservfecc set {0..63}
diffservvideo get
diffservvideo set {0..63}



set Sets the command. A priority level in the range
{0..63} is required.

{0..63} Specifies the priority level.

Feedback Examples

• diffservaudio set 2
returns
diffservaudio 2

• diffservaudio get
returns
diffservaudio 2

Comments
If the typeofservice command on page 4-279 is set to ip-precedence rather than
to diffserv, these commands are not applicable.
Quality of Service: Type of Service > DiffServ

4 - 73


dir
Lists flash files. No wild cards are allowed.

Syntax
dir [“string”]


“string” Lists flash files which partially match a string (such as
“dat” or “abk”) of up to 250 alphanumeric characters. To
list all the files, omit “string”.

Feedback Examples

• dir abk
returns a list of all files in the local directory (address book)

4 - 74

System Commands

directory
Sets or gets whether the Directory button appears on the home screen.

Syntax
directory <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the Directory button on the home screen.

no Removes the Directory button from the home screen.

Feedback Examples

• directory yes
returns
directory yes

• directory no
returns
directory no

• directory get
returns
directory no

Comments
> Home Screen Settings: Directory

4 - 75


display (deprecated)
Displays information about the current call or the system. With the
implementation of the callinfo command on page 4-37 and whoami
command on page 4-309, this command has been deprecated.

Syntax
display call
display whoami


call Displays the following information about the current
call: call ID, status, speed, the number to which this
system is connected.

whoami Returns information about the current system.

Feedback Examples

• display call
returns
Call ID Status Speed Dialed Num
------- ------------------ ----- ----------
34 CM_CALLINFO_CONNECTED 384 192.168.1.101

• display whoami
returns
Hi, my name is: Polycom VSX Demo
Here is what I know about myself:
Model: VSX7000
Serial Number: 82065205E72EB1
Software Version: Release 8.7 - 26Jun2007 11:30
Build Information: root on domain.polycom.com
FPGA Revision: 4.3.0
Main Processor: BSP15
Time In Last Call: 0:43:50
Total Time In Calls: 87:17:17
Total Calls: 819
SNTP Time Service: auto insync ntp1.polycom.com
Local Time is: Mon, 9 Jul 2007
Network Interface: NONE
IP Video Number: 192.168.1.101
ISDN Video Number: 7005551212
MP Enabled: True
H.323 Enabled: True
FTP Enabled: True
HTTP Enabled: True
SNMP Enabled: True

4 - 76

System Commands

displayglobaladdresses
Sets or gets the display of global addresses in the global directory.

Syntax
displayglobaladdresses <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the display of global addresses.

no Disables the display of global addresses.

Feedback Examples

• displayglobaladdresses yes
returns
displayglobaladdresses yes

• displayglobaladdresses no
returns
displayglobaladdresses no

• displayglobaladdresses get
returns

Comments
Directory Servers: Display Global Addresses

4 - 77


displaygraphics
Sets or gets the display of graphic icons while in a call.

Syntax
displaygraphics <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the display of graphic icons.

no Disables the display of graphic icons.

Feedback Examples

• displaygraphics yes
returns
displaygraphics yes

• displaygraphics no
returns
displaygraphics no

• displaygraphics get
returns
displaygraphics no

Comments
Monitors: Display Icons in a Call

4 - 78

System Commands

displayipext
Sets or gets the display of the IP extension field. This extension is needed when
placing a call through a gateway.

Syntax
displayipext <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the display of the IP extension.

no Enables the display of the IP extension.

Feedback Examples

• displayipext yes
returns
displayipext yes

• displayipext no
returns
displayipext no

• displayipext get
returns
displayipext no

Comments
When this option is selected, the extension field is visible on the Place a Call
screen.
H.323 Settings: Display H.323 Extension

4 - 79


displayipisdninfo (deprecated)
Sets or gets the display of IP and ISDN information on the home screen. This
command has been deprecated. Polycom recommends using the ipisdninfo
command on page 4-149.

Syntax
displayipisdninfo <yes|no|both|ip-only|isdn-only|none|get>


yes Enables the display of both IP and ISDN information.
Provides feedback both.

no Disables the display of IP and ISDN information.
Provides feedback none.

both Enables the display of both IP and ISDN information.

ip-only Disables the display of IP information.

isdn-only Enables the display of ISDN information.

none Disables the display of IP and ISDN information.


Feedback Examples

• displayipisdninfo yes
returns
displayipisdninfo both

• displayipisdninfo no
returns
displayipisdninfo none

• displayipisdninfo ip-only
returns
displayipisdninfo ip-only

• displayipisdninfo get
returns
displayipisdninfo ip-only

Comments
> Home Screen Settings (page 2): IP or ISDN Information

4 - 80

System Commands

displayparams
Outputs a list of system settings.

Syntax
displayparams

Feedback Examples

• displayparams
returns
systemname Polycom VSX Demo
hostname <empty>
ipaddress 192.168.1.101
wanipaddress 192.168.1.102
version “release 8.7 - 26jun2007 11:30”
serialnum 82065205E72EB1
allowremotemonitoring no
daylightsavings yes
requireacctnumtodial no
validateacctnum no
timediffgmt -12:00
gabserverip <empty>
gabpassword <empty>
registerthissystem no
showaddrsingab both
primarycallchoice manual
secondarycallchoice none
preferredalias extension
gatewaynumbertype number+extension
usegatekeeper off
numdigitsdid 7
numdigitsext 4
gatewaycountrycode <empty>
gatewayareacode <empty>
gatewaynumber <empty>
gatekeeperip <empty>
h323name <empty>
e164ext 7878
gatewayext 123456789
usepathnavigator required

4 - 81


dns
Sets or gets the configuration for up to four DNS servers.

Syntax
dns get {1..4}
dns set {1..4} “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”


get Returns the current IP address of the specified server.
A server identification number {1..4} is required.

{1..4} Specifies the server identification number.

set Sets the IP address of the specified DNS server when
followed by the “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” parameter.
A server identification number {1..4} is required.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” Specifies the IP address for the specified server.

Feedback Examples

• dns set 1 192.168.1.205
returns
dns 1 192.168.1.205

Comments
After making a change, you are prompted to restart the system. These values
cannot be set if the system is in DHCP client mode.
(page 2): DNS Servers

4 - 82

System Commands

dsr
Sets or gets the configuration of the DSR serial interface control signal (data set
ready). This command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface

Syntax
dsr <get|normal|inverted>





Feedback Examples

• dsr normal
returns
dsr normal

• dsr inverted
returns
dsr inverted

• dsr get
returns
dsr inverted

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): DSR

4 - 83


dsranswer
Sets or gets the configuration of the DSR serial interface control signal to
indicate an incoming call. This command is only applicable if you have a V.35
network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
dsranswer <get|on|off>



on Turns on the option.

off Turns off the option.

Feedback Examples

• dsranswer on
returns
dsranswer on

• dsranswer off
returns
dsranswer off

• dsranswer get
returns
dsranswer off

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): Answer on DSR

4 - 84

System Commands

dtr
Sets or gets the configuration of the DTR serial interface control signal (data
terminal ready). This command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network

Syntax
dtr <get|normal|inverted|on>





on Sets constant high voltage. If this option is selected,
inverted is not an option.

Feedback Examples

• dtr normal
returns
dtr normal

• dtr inverted
returns
dtr inverted

• dtr on
returns
dtr on

• dtr get
returns
dtr on

Comments
The default setting for the signal is “normal”.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): DTR

4 - 85


dualmonitor
Sets or gets whether video is displayed using dual monitor emulation, or
split-screen mode, when using one monitor.

Syntax
dualmonitor <get|yes|no>



yes Enables dual monitor emulation.

no Disables dual monitor emulation.

Feedback Examples

• dualmonitor yes
returns
dualmonitor yes

• dualmonitor no
returns
dualmonitor no

• dualmonitor get
returns
dualmonitor no

Comments
Monitors: Dual Monitor Emulation

4 - 86

System Commands

dynamicbandwidth
Sets or gets the use of dynamic bandwidth allocation for Quality of Service.

Syntax
dynamicbandwidth <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the dynamic bandwidth option.

no Disables the dynamic bandwidth option.

Feedback Examples

• dynamicbandwidth yes
returns
dynamicbandwidth yes

• dynamicbandwidth no
returns
dynamicbandwidth no

• dynamicbandwidth get
returns
dynamicbandwidth no

Comments
The system’s dynamic bandwidth function automatically finds the optimum
line speed for a call. If you experience excessive packet loss while in a call, the
dynamic bandwidth function decrements the line speed until there is no
packet loss. This is supported in calls with end points that also support
dynamic bandwidth.
Quality of Service (page 2): Dynamic Bandwidth

4 - 87


e164ext
Sets or gets an H.323 (IP) extension, also known as an E.164 name, needed for
inbound calls going through a gateway.

Syntax
e164ext get
e164ext set “e.164name”



set Sets the E.164 extension when followed by the
“e.164name” parameter. To erase the current setting,
omit “e.164name”.

“e.164name” A valid E.164 extension (usually a four-digit number).

Feedback Examples

• e164ext set
returns
e164ext <empty>

• e164ext set 7878
returns
e164ext 7878

• e164ext get 7878
returns
e164ext 7878

Comments
The extension number is associated with a specific LAN device.
H.323 Settings: H.323 Extension (E.164)

4 - 88

System Commands

echo
Prints “string” back to the API client screen.

Syntax
echo “string”


“string” Text to be printed to the screen.

Feedback Examples
• echo End of abk range results
returns
End of abk range results

Comments
Certain API commands print multiple lines without any delimiter string to
notify end of command response. This forces a control panel program to guess
when the command's response string is going to end. In those scenarios,
control panel can issue the legacy command followed by echo command with
a delimiter string of their choosing. Once legacy command's response ends,
echo command gets processed which will result in the delimiter string printed
to the API client.

4 - 89


echocanceller
Sets or gets the configuration of echo cancellation, which prevents users from
hearing their voices loop back from the far site.

Syntax
echocanceller <get|yes|no>


red Line in red.

white Line in white.


yes Enables the echo canceller option.

no Disables the echo canceller option.

Feedback Examples

• echocanceller yes
returns
echocancellerred yes
echocancellerwhite yes

• echocanceller no
returns
echocancellerred no
echocancellerwhite no

• echocanceller get
returns
echocancellerred no

Comments
This option is enabled by default. Polycom strongly recommends that you do
not turn off echo cancellation except when using an external microphone
system with its own built-in echo cancellation.

Sending echocanceller yes is equivalent to sending both echocancellerred
yes and echocancellerwhite yes.
Sending echocanceller no is equivalent to sending both echocancellerred no
and echocancellerwhite no.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Audio (page 2):
Echo Canceller

4 - 90

System Commands

See Also
You can also use the echocancellerred command on page 4-92 and
echocancellerwhite command on page 4-93.

4 - 91


echocancellerred
Sets or gets the line in red (right) echo canceller setting.

Syntax
echocancellerred <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the echo canceller option for red line in.

no Disables the echo canceller option for red line in.

Examples

• echocancellerred no
returns
echocancellerred no

• echocancellerred yes
returns

• echocancellerred get
returns

Comments
Echo Canceller

4 - 92

System Commands

echocancellerwhite
Sets or gets the line in white (left) echo canceller setting.

Syntax
echocancellerwhite <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the echo canceller option for white line in.

no Disables the echo canceller option for white line in.

Feedback Examples

• echocancellerwhite no
returns

• echocancellerwhite yes
returns

• echocancellerwhite get
returns

Comments
Echo Canceller

4 - 93


enablefirewalltraversal
Sets or gets the Enable NAT/Firewall Traversal setting. This feature requires
an Edgewater session border controller that supports H.460.

Syntax
enablefirewalltraversal <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the firewall traversal feature.

no Disables the firewall traversal feature.

Feedback Examples

• enablefirewalltraversal yes
returns
enablefirewalltraversal yes

• enablefirewalltraversal no
returns
enablefirewalltraversal no

• enablefirewalltraversal get
returns
enablefirewalltraversal no

Comments
Firewall (page 2): Enable NAT/Firewall Traversal

4 - 94

System Commands

enablepvec
Sets or gets the PVEC (Polycom Video Error Concealment) setting on the
system.

Syntax
enablepvec <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the PVEC option.

no Disables the PVEC option.

Feedback Examples

• enablepvec yes
returns
enablepvec yes

• enablepvec no
returns
enablepvec no

• enablepvec get
returns
enablepvec no

Comments
This option is enabled by default.
Quality of Service: Enable PVEC

4 - 95


enablersvp
Sets or gets the RSVP (Resource Reservation Setup Protocol) setting on the
system, which requests that routers reserve bandwidth along an IP connection
path.

Syntax
enablersvp <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the RSVP option.

no Disables the RSVP option.

Feedback Examples

• enablersvp yes
returns
enablersvp yes

• enablersvp no
returns
enablersvp no

• enablersvp get
returns
enablersvp no

Comments
This option is enabled by default.
Quality of Service: Enable RSVP

4 - 96

System Commands

enablesnmp
Sets or gets the SNMP configuration.

Syntax
enablesnmp <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the SNMP option.

no Disables the SNMP option.

Feedback Examples

• enablesnmp yes
returns
enablesnmp yes

• enablesnmp no
returns
enablesnmp no

• enablesnmp get
returns
enablesnmp no

Comments
Changing this setting causes the system to restart. This option is enabled by
default.
SNMP: Enable SNMP

4 - 97


encryption
Sets or gets the AES encryption mode for the system.

Syntax
encryption <get|yes|no>



yes Use encryption when the far site is capable of
encryption.

no Disables encryption.

Feedback Examples

• encryption yes
returns
encryption yes

• encryption no
returns
encryption no

• encryption get
returns
encryption no

Comments
You cannot use this command while a call is in progress.
The encryption options are only visible on the user interface if an encryption
key has been entered.
> Security (page 2): AES Encryption

4 - 98

System Commands

exit
Ends the API command session.

Syntax
exit

Feedback Examples

• exit
returns
Connection to host lost.

Comments
This command ends a Telnet session. For serial sessions, this command
effectively starts a new session.

4 - 99


farcontrolnearcamera
Sets or gets far control of the near camera, which allows far sites to control the
camera on your system.

Syntax
farcontrolnearcamera <get|yes|no>



yes Allows the far site to control the near camera if the far
site has this capability.

no Disables far control of the near camera.

Feedback Examples

• farcontrolnearcamera yes
returns
farcontrolnearcamera yes

• farcontrolnearcamera no
returns
farcontrolnearcamera no

• farcontrolnearcamera get
returns
farcontrolnearcamera no

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Cameras: Far
Control of Near Camera

4 - 100

System Commands

farnametimedisplay
Sets or gets the length of time the far-site name is displayed on the system.

Syntax
farnametimedisplay off
farnametimedisplay <get|on|15|30|60|120>


off Disables the far site name display.


on Displays the far site name for the duration of the call.

15|30|60|120 Specifies the number of seconds to display the far site
name at the beginning of a call.

Feedback Examples

• farnametimedisplay off
returns
farnametimedisplay off

• farnametimedisplay on
returns
farnametimedisplay on

• farnametimedisplay 60
returns
farnametimedisplay 60

• farnametimedisplay get
returns
farnametimedisplay 60

Comments
> System Settings > Call Settings (page 2): Far Site Name Display Time

4 - 101


flash
Flashes the analog phone call, either an analog phone or a SoundStation VTX
1000.

Syntax
flash [“callid”]
flash [“callid”] [“duration”]


callid Specifies the callid to flash.

duration Specifies the pulse duration in ms.

Feedback Examples

• flash 34 5
returns
flash 34 5
and flashes callid 34 for 5 ms

4 - 102

System Commands

gabk
Returns global directory (address book) entries.

Syntax
gabk all
gabk batch {0..59}
gabk batch define “start_no” “stop_no”
gabk batch search “pattern” “count”
gabk letter {a..z}
gabk range “start_no” “stop_no”
gabk refresh


all Returns all entries in the global directory.

batch Returns a batch of global directory entries in batches
(batch size determined by global directory). Requires a
batch number, which must be an integer in the range
{0..59}. Batches should be requested sequentially to
ensure receiving a complete list of entries.

define Returns a batch of entries in the range defined by
“start_no” to “stop_no.” Polycom recommends using
gabk range instead of this command.

“start_no” Specifies the beginning of the range of entries to return.

“stop_no” Specifies the end of the range of entries to return.

search Specifies a batch search.

“pattern” Specifies pattern to match for the batch search.

“count” Specifies the number of entries to list that match the
pattern.

letter Returns entries beginning with the letter specified from
the range {a..z}. Requires one or two alphanumeric
characters. Valid characters are:
- _ / ; @ , .
0 through 9, a through z

range Returns global directory entries numbered
“start_no” through “stop_no”. Requires two
integers.

refresh Gets a more current copy of the global directory.

Feedback Examples
gabk all
Feedback is similar to feedback returned from the abk command on page 4-5,
but preceded with gabk.

4 - 103


gabpassword
Sets or gets the password to gain access to the Global Directory Server.

Syntax
gabpassword [{1..5}|all] get
gabpassword [{1..5}] set [“password”]


{1..5} References GDS server {1..5}.

all Returns all current entries.


set Sets the GDS password to “password”. To erase the
current setting, omit “password”.

“password” Password to access the GDS server. Valid characters
are: a through z (lower and uppercase), -, _, @, /, ;,
,, ., , 0 through 9. Enclose the string in quotation
marks if it includes spaces.

Feedback Examples

• gabpassword set gabpass
returns
gabpassword gabpass

• gabpassword get
returns
gabpassword gabpass

• gabpassword 1 set gabpass
returns
gabpassword 1 gabpass

• gabpassword 1 get
returns
gabpassword 1 gabpass

This command might not return the current password in correct case-sensitive
format.

Comments
This command cannot be used unless the adminpassword command on
page 4-8 (or the Remote Access password in the user interface) has been set.
Directory Servers: Password

4 - 104

System Commands

gabserverip
Sets or gets the IP address of the Global Directory Server.

Syntax
gabserverip [{1..5}|all] get
gabserverip [{1..5}] set [“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”]




all References all GDS servers.

set Sets the GDS server’s IP address when followed by the
parameter “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. To erase the current
setting, omit the “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” parameter.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address of the GDS server. Can be a numeric or
character string.

Feedback Examples

• gabserverip set
returns
gabserverip <empty>

• gabserverip set gab.polycom.com
returns
gabserverip gab.polycom.com

• gabserverip get
returns
gabserverip gab.polycom.com

• gabserverip 2 set 192.168.1.101
returns
gabserverip 2 192.168.1.101

• gabserverip all get
returns
gabserverip 1 gab.polycom.com
gabserverip 2 192.168.1.101
gabserverip 3 <empty>

Comments
Directory Servers: Global Directory (GDS)

4 - 105


gatekeeperip
Sets or gets the IP address of the primary gatekeeper.

Syntax
gatekeeperip get
gatekeeperip set [“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”]



set Sets the gatekeeper IP address when followed by the
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” parameter. To erase the current
setting, omit “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address of the gatekeeper.

Feedback Examples

• gatekeeperip set 192.168.1.205
returns
gatekeeperip 192.168.1.205

• gatekeeperip get
returns
gatekeeperip 192.168.1.205

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 2): Gatekeeper IP Address
The Use Gatekeeper option on the same page must be set to Auto or Specify
for the Gatekeeper IP Address to be available.

4 - 106

System Commands

gatekeeperpin
Sets or gets the gatekeeper Authentication Pin.

Syntax
gatekeeperpin get
gatekeeperpin set [“pin”]



set Sets the Authentication PIN when followed by the
“pin” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit the
“pin” parameter.

“pin” Authentication PIN for the gatekeeper.

Feedback Examples

• gatekeeperpin set
returns
gatekeeperpin <empty>

• gatekeeperpin set 12345
returns
gatekeeperpin 12345

• gatekeeperpin get
returns
gatekeeperpin 12345

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 2): Authentication PIN
The Use Gatekeeper option on the same page must be set to Specify with PIN
for Authentication PIN to be available.

4 - 107


gatewayareacode
Sets or gets the gateway area code.

Syntax
gatewayareacode get
gatewayareacode set [“areacode”]


get Returns the area code for the gateway.

set Sets the area code when followed by the “areacode”
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“areacode”.

“areacode” Numeric string specifying the area code.

Feedback Examples

• gatewayareacode get
returns
gatewayareacode <empty>

• gatewayareacode set 512
returns
gatewayareacode 512

• gatewayareacode get
returns
gatewayareacode 512

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 4): Area Code

4 - 108

System Commands

gatewaycountrycode
Sets or gets the gateway country code.

Syntax
gatewaycountrycode get
gatewaycountrycode set [“countrycode”]



set Sets the gateway country code when followed by the
“countrycode” parameter. To erase the current
setting, omit “countrycode”.

“countrycode” Numeric string specifying the gateway country code.

Feedback Examples

• gatewaycountrycode set 1
returns
gatewaycountrycode 1

• gatewaycountrycode get
returns
gatewaycountrycode 1

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 4): Country Code

4 - 109


gatewayext
Sets or gets the gateway extension number.

Syntax
gatewayext get
gatewayext set [“extension”]



set Sets the gateway extension number when followed by
the “extension” parameter. To erase the current
setting, omit “extension”.

“extension” Numeric string specifying the gateway extension.

Feedback Examples

• gatewayext set 59715
returns
gatewayext 59715

• gatewayext get
returns
gatewayext 59715

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 4): H.323 Extension (E.164)

4 - 110

System Commands

gatewaynumber
Sets or gets the gateway number.

Syntax
gatewaynumber get
gatewaynumber set [“number”]



set Sets the gateway number when followed by the
“number” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“number”.

“number” Numeric string specifying the gateway number.

Feedback Examples

• gatewaynumber set 5551212
returns

• gatewaynumber get
returns

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 4): Number

4 - 111


gatewaynumbertype
Sets or gets the Gateway Number Type, which can be either Direct Inward Dial
(DID) or Number+Extension.

Syntax
gatewaynumbertype <get|did|number+extension>



did Indicates that the gateway number is a direct inward
dial number; it has no extension.

number+extension Indicates that the gateway number includes an
extension.
This option allows the call to go through directly (it dials
the Gateway Number + ## + Extension as one
number).

Feedback Examples

• gatewaynumbertype did
returns
gatewaynumbertype direct_inward_dial

• gatewaynumbertype number+extension
returns
gatewaynumbertype number_plus_extension

• gatewaynumbertype get
returns
gatewaynumbertype number_plus_extension

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 4): Gateway Number Type

4 - 112

System Commands

gatewayprefix
Sets or gets the gateway prefixes for the corresponding speeds.

Syntax
gatewayprefix get “valid speed”
gatewayprefix set “valid speed” [“value”]


get When followed by the “valid speed” parameter,
returns the current value for this speed.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are: 56, 64, 2x56, 112, 2x64, 128, 168,
192, 224, 256, 280, 320, 336, 384, 392, 7x64, 8x56,
504, 512, 560, 576, 616, 640, 672, 704, 728, 768, 784,
832, 840, 16x56, 14x64, 952, 960, 1008, 1024, 1064,
1088, 1120, 1152, 1176, 1216, 1232, 1280, 1288,
24x56, 21x64, 1400, 1408, 1456, 1472, 1512, 1536,
1568, 1600, 1624, 1664, 1680, 1728, 1736, 32x56,
28x64, 1848, 1856, 1904, and 1920 kbps.

set Sets the gateway prefix when followed by the “value”
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit “value”.

“value” Prefix (code) used for a particular call speed. Consult
your gateway instruction manual to determine which
codes are appropriate.

Feedback Examples
• gatewayprefix set 168 90
returns
gatewayprefix 168 90

• gatewayprefix get 168
returns
gatewayprefix 168 90

Comments
Some gateways require a number to be prepended (prefix) to the gateway
number. The prefix identifies which gateway is used to dial a call at a
particular data rate.
H.323 Settings (page 4): Prefix

4 - 113


gatewaysetup
Lists all available speeds and values at once.

Syntax
gatewaysetup

Feedback Examples
• gatewaysetup
returns
56 <empty> <empty>
64 #14 #16
2x56 #222 #333
112 #444 #555
2x64 <empty> <empty>
and so on.

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 4): Prefix and Suffix

4 - 114

System Commands

gatewaysuffix
Sets or gets the gateway suffix.

Syntax
gatewaysuffix get “valid speed”
gatewaysuffix set “valid speed” [“value”]


get Returns the current value for this speed.

192, 224, 256, 280, 320, 336, 384, 392, 7x64, 8x56,
504, 512, 560, 576, 616, 640, 672, 704, 728, 768, 784,
832, 840, 16x56, 14x64, 952, 960, 1008, 1024, 1064,
1088, 1120, 1152, 1176, 1216, 1232, 1280, 1288,
24x56, 21x64, 1400, 1408, 1456, 1472, 1512, 1536,
1568, 1600, 1624, 1664, 1680, 1728, 1736, 32x56,
28x64, 1848, 1856, 1904, and 1920 kbps.

set Sets the gateway suffix when followed by the “value”
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit “value”.

“value” Suffix (code) used for a particular call speed. Consult
your gateway instruction manual to determine which
codes are appropriate. Use quotation marks around a
compound name or strings that contain spaces. For
example: “united states” or “111 222 333”.

Feedback Examples

• gatewaysuffix set 192 11
returns
gatewaysuffix 192 11

• gatewaysuffix get 192
returns
gatewaysuffix 192 11

Comments
Some gateways require a number to be appended (suffix) to the gateway
number. The suffix identifies which gateway is used to dial a call at a
particular data rate.
H.323 Settings (page 4): Suffix

4 - 115


gendial
Generates DTMF dialing tones over a video call.

Syntax
gendial <{0..9}|#|*>


{0..9} Generates the DTMF tone corresponding to telephone
buttons 0-9.

# Generates the DTMF tone corresponding to a
telephone # button.

* Generates the DTMF tone corresponding to a
telephone * button.

Feedback Examples

• gendial 2
returns
gendial 2
and causes the system to produce the DTMF tone corresponding to a
telephone’s 2 button

Comments
User interface screen location: On the near or far video screen, press # on the
remote control to access a keypad for generating tones.

4 - 116

System Commands

gendialtonepots (deprecated)
Generates DTMF dialing tones over an analog phone line. This command has
been deprecated. Polycom recommends using the gendial command on
page 4-116.

Syntax
gendialtonepots <{0..9}|#|*>


{0..9} Generates the DTMF tone corresponding to telephone
buttons 0-9.

# Generates the DTMF tone corresponding to a
telephone # button.

* Generates the DTMF tone corresponding to a
telephone * button.

Feedback Examples

• gendialtonepots 2
returns
gendialtonepots 2
and causes the system to produce the DTMF tone corresponding to a
telephone’s 2 button

See Also
To generate DTMF tones over video, use the gendial command on page 4-116.

4 - 117


generatetone
Turns the test tone on or off. The tone is used to check the monitor audio cable
connections or to monitor the volume level.

Syntax
generatetone <on|off>


on Turns on the test tone.

off Turns off the test tone.

Feedback Examples

• generatetone on
returns
generatetone on
and the system produces a test tone

• generatetone off
returns
generatetone off
and the system stops producing a test tone

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Audio > Speaker Test

4 - 118

System Commands

get screen
Returns the name of the current screen so that the control panel programmer
knows which screen the user interface is currently displaying.

Syntax
get screen

Feedback Examples

• get screen
returns
screen: near

• get screen
returns
screen: makeacall

• get screen
returns
screen: generatetone

See Also
You can also use the screen command on page 4-237.

4 - 119


getcallstate
Gets the state of the calls in the current conference.

Syntax
getcallstate

Feedback Examples

• getcallstate
returns
cs: call[34] speed[384] dialstr[192.168.1.101] state[connected]
cs: call[1] inactive
cs: call[2] inactive

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Call Statistics

See Also
To register the shell session to receive notifications about call state activities,
see the callstate command on page 4-39.

4 - 120

System Commands

gmscity
Sets or gets the Global Management System™ city information.

Syntax
gmscity get
gmscity set [“city”]



set Sets the Global Management System city name when
followed by the “city” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit “city”.

“city” Character string specifying the city. Enclose the string
in quotation marks if it includes spaces. Example: “San
Antonio”

Feedback Examples

• gmscity get
returns
gmscity <empty>

• gmscity set Paris
returns
gmscity Paris

• gmscity get
returns
gmscity Paris

Comments
My Information: City

4 - 121


gmscontactemail
Sets or gets the Global Management System contact E-mail information.

Syntax
gmscontactemail get
gmscontactemail set [“email”]


get Returns the current contact E-mail address.

set Sets the Global Management system contact E-mail
address when followed by the “email” parameter. To
erase the current setting, omit “email”.

“email” Alphanumeric string specifying the E-mail address.

Feedback Examples

• gmscontactemail get
returns
gmscontactemail <empty>

• gmscontactemail set john_polycom@polycom.com
returns
gmscontactemail john_polycom@polycom.com

• gmscontactemail get
returns
gmscontactemail john_polycom@polycom.com

Comments
My Information: Contact Email

4 - 122

System Commands

gmscontactfax
Sets or gets the Global Management System contact fax information

Syntax
gmscontactfax get
gmscontactfax set [“fax number”]


get Returns the current contact fax information.

set Sets the Global Management System contact fax
information when followed by the “fax number”
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit “fax
number”.

“fax number” Character string specifying the fax number. Enclose the
string in quotation marks if it includes spaces. Example:
“408 555 2323”

Feedback Examples

• gmscontactfax get
returns
gmscontactfax <empty>

• gmscontactfax set “408 555 2323”
returns
gmscontactfax 4085552323

• gmscontactfax get
returns
gmscontactfax 4085552323

Comments
My Information: Contact Fax

4 - 123


gmscontactnumber
Sets or gets the Global Management System contact number information.

Syntax
gmscontactnumber get
gmscontactnumber set [“number”]


get Returns the current contact number.

set Sets the Global Management System contact number
when followed by the “number” parameter. To erase
the current setting, omit “number”.

“number” Numeric string specifying the contact number. Enclose
the string in quotation marks if it includes spaces.
Example: “408 555 2323”

Feedback Examples

• gmscontactnumber get
returns
gmscontactnumber <empty>

• gmscontactnumber set “408 555 2323”
returns
gmscontactnumber 4085552323

• gmscontactnumber get
returns
gmscontactnumber 4085552323

Comments
My Information: Contact Number

4 - 124

System Commands

gmscontactperson
Sets or gets the Global Management System contact person information.

Syntax
gmscontactperson get
gmscontactperson set [“person”]


get Returns the current contact person information.

set Sets the Global Management System contact person
name when followed by the “person” parameter. To
erase the current setting, omit “person”.

“person” Character string specifying the contact person. Enclose
Example: “Mary Polycom”

Feedback Examples

• gmscontactperson get
returns
gmscontactperson <empty>

• gmscontactperson set “Mary Polycom”
returns
gmscontactperson “Mary Polycom”

• gmscontactperson get
returns
gmscontactnumber “Mary Polycom”

Comments
My Information: Contact Person

4 - 125


gmscountry
Sets or gets the Global Management System country information.

Syntax
gmscountry get
gmscountry set [“countryname”]


get Returns the current country setting.

set Sets the Global Management System country
information when followed by the “countryname”
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“countryname”.

“countryname” Character string specifying the country. Enclose the
string in quotation marks if it includes spaces. Example:
“United States”

Feedback Examples

• gmscountry get
returns
gmscountry <empty>

• gmscountry set Argentina
returns
gmscountry Argentina

• gmscountry get
returns
gmscountry Argentina

Comments
My Information: Country

4 - 126

System Commands

gmsstate
Sets or gets the Global Management System state information.

Syntax
gmsstate get
gmsstate set [“state”]


get Returns the current state information.

set Sets the Global Management System state information
when followed by the “state” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit the “state” parameter.

“state” Character string specifying the state information.
Enclose the string in quotation marks if it includes
spaces. Example: “West Virginia”

Feedback Examples

• gmsstate get
returns
gmsstate <empty>

• gmsstate set Texas
returns
gmsstate Texas

• gmsstate get
returns
gmsstate Texas

Comments
My Information: State/Province

4 - 127


gmstechsupport
Sets or gets the Global Management System technical support phone number.

Syntax
gmstechsupport get
gmstechsupport set [“tech_support_digits”]


get Returns the current tech support phone number
information.

set Sets the technical support information when followed
by the “tech_support_digits” parameter. To erase
the current setting, omit “tech_support_digits”.

“tech_support_digits” Numeric string specifying the tech support phone
number. Enclose the string in quotation marks if it
includes spaces. Example: “408 555 2323”

Feedback Examples

• gmstechsupport get
returns
gmstechsupport <empty>

• gmstechsupport set “408 555 2323”
returns
gmstechsupport 4085552323

• gmstechsupport get
returns
gmstechsupport 4085552323

Comments
My Information: Tech Support

4 - 128

System Commands

gmsurl
Sets or gets the URL of the Global Management System server that manages
your system. This command automatically appends “/pwx/vs_status.asp”.

Syntax
gmsurl get {1..10}
gmsurl set {1..10} “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
gmsurl get all


get Returns the current URL information for a selected
server. A server must be specified.

{1..10} Global Management System server number. The
primary Global Management System server that
performs account validation is always server 1.

set Sets the current URL information for a selected server.
A server must be specified.

all Returns information for all Global Management System
servers.

Feedback Examples

• gmsurl set 1 192.168.1.101
returns
gmsurl 1 192.168.1.101/pwx/nx_status.asp

• gmsurl get 1
returns
gmsurl 1 192.168.1.101/pwx/nx_status.asp

Comments
When you are registered with the Global Management System, this
information is automatically configured.
Management Servers

4 - 129


graphicsmonitor
Sets or gets the graphics monitor configuration for one of these choices:
monitor1, monitor2, or a Visual Concert VSX monitor.

Syntax
graphicsmonitor <get|tv|fxvga|visualconcert|1|2|vcnx>



tv Deprecated.

fxvga Deprecated.

visualconcert Deprecated.

1 Selects Monitor 1 as the graphics monitor.

2 Selects Monitor 2 as the graphics monitor.

vcnx Selects Visual Concert VSX as the graphics monitor.
Enable this option if Visual Concert VSX is connected
to your system and the graphics monitor is directly
connected to Visual Concert VSX. This allows your
system to display your computer desktop on your
system’s VGA monitor.

Feedback Examples
• graphicsmonitor 1
returns
graphicsmonitor 1

• graphicsmonitor vcnx
returns
graphicsmonitor vcnx

• graphicsmonitor get
returns
graphicsmonitor vcnx

Comments
When you use this command to set the graphics monitor, you automatically
turn off the other two choices.
Monitors: Graphics Content Display

4 - 130

System Commands

h239enable
Sets or gets the H.239 People+Content™ setting.

Syntax
h239enable get
h239enable <yes|no>



yes Enables H.239 People+Content on the system.

no Disables H.239 People+Content on the system.

Feedback Examples

• h239enable yes
returns
h239enable yes

• h239enable no
returns
h239enable no

• h239enable get
returns
h239enable no

Comments
Preference: Enable H.239

4 - 131


h323name
Sets or gets the system’s H.323 name.

Syntax
h323name get
h323name set [“H.323name”]



set Sets the H.323 name when followed by the
“H.323name” parameter. To erase this setting, omit the
“H.323name” parameter.

“H.323name” Character string specifying the H.323 name. Use
quotation marks around strings that contain spaces.
For example: “Polycom VSX Demo”

Feedback Examples

• h323name set My
returns
h323name my

• h323name set “Polycom VSX Demo”
returns
h323name “polycom vsx demo”

• h323name get
returns
h323name “polycom vsx demo”

Comments
H.323 Settings: H.323 Name

4 - 132

System Commands

h331audiomode
Set or gets the audio protocol sent during H.331 calls. This command is only
applicable if you have a V.35 network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
h331audiomode
<get|g729|g728|g711u|g711a|g722-56|g722-48|g7221-16|g7221-24|
g7221-32|siren14|siren14stereo|off>



g729|g728|g711u| Sets the audio protocol to this value for H.331 calls.
g711a|g722-56|
g722-48|g7221-16|
g7221-24|g7221-32|
siren14|
siren14stereo

off Turns audio mode off for H.331 calls.

Feedback Examples

• h331audiomode g.728
returns
h331audiomode g.728

• h331audiomode “siren 14”
returns
h331audiomode “siren 14”

• h331audiomode off
returns
h331audiomode off

Comments
This value cannot be changed during a call.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 5): Audio Protocol

4 - 133


h331dualstream
Set or gets the dual stream setting used for H.331 calls. This command is only

Syntax
h331dualstream <get|on|off>



on Turns on dual stream for H.331 calls.

off Turns off dual stream for H.331 calls.

Feedback Examples

• h331dualstream on
returns
h331dualstream on

• h331dualstream off
returns
h331dualstream off

• h331dualstream get
returns
h331dualstream off

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 5): Enable People+Content

4 - 134

System Commands

h331framerate
Sets or gets the frame rate sent during H.331 calls. This command is only

Syntax
h331framerate <get|30|15|10|7.5>



30|15|10|7.5 Sets the frame rate to this value for H.331 calls.

Feedback Examples

• h331framerate 15
returns
h331framerate 15

• h331framerate 30
returns
h331framerate 30

• h331framerate get
returns
h331framerate 30

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 5): Frame Rate

4 - 135


h331videoformat
Sets or gets the video format for H.331 calls. This command is only applicable
if you have a V.35 network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
h331videoformat <get|fcif>



fcif Sets the video format to FCIF for H.331 calls.

Feedback Examples

• h331videoformat fcif
returns
h331videoformat fcif

• h331videoformat get
returns
h331videoformat fcif

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 5): Video Format

4 - 136

System Commands

h331videoprotocol
Sets or gets the H.331 video protocol sent during H.331 calls. This command is
only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
h331videoprotocol <get|h264|h263+|h263|h261>



h264|h263+|h263|h261 Sets the video protocol to this value for H.331 calls.

Feedback Examples

• h331videoprotocol h264
returns
h331videoprotocol h264

• h331videoprotocol h263+
returns
h331videoprotocol h263+

• h331videoprotocol get
returns
h331videoprotocol h263+

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 5): Video Protocol

4 - 137


hangup
Hangs up the current video or phone call.

Syntax
hangup phone
hangup video [“callid”]
hangup all


phone Disconnects the current analog phone (audio-only) site.

video Disconnects the current video call. If the “callid”
parameter is omitted, the system disconnects all video
far sites in the call.

all Disconnects all video and audio sites in the call.

Feedback Examples

• hangup video 2
returns
cleared: call[34]
dialstring[IP:192.168.1.101 NAME:Polycom VSX Demo]
ended: call[34]
and disconnects the specified site, leaving other sites connected

Comments
After sending the hangup command, feedback that the call has ended can take
up to 15 seconds.

4 - 138

System Commands

help
Returns a simple or detailed list of commands when used with the parameters
all, help, string, or syntax. Also switches help display mode when used with
the parameters verbose or terse. This command without parameters returns
the list of command names only.

Syntax
help [all|help|”string”]
help [verbose|terse|syntax]
help apropos “string”


all Describes the various types of help described in this
section.

help Returns help for using the help command.

“string” Returns detailed help for any commands beginning
with “string”. Use quotation marks around strings
that contain spaces. For example: “display call”

verbose Selects verbose mode, which shows syntax and help
for commands.

terse Selects terse mode, which shows help for commands
without showing syntax.

syntax Returns the help syntax conventions.

apropos Returns help on any command or command
description containing “string”.

Feedback Examples

• help terse
returns
current help mode is: terse

• help dualmonitor
returns
dualmonitor <get|yes|no>
-Get/set dual monitor emulation.

4 - 139


history
Lists the last commands used in the current session.

Syntax
history

Feedback Examples

• history
returns
1 ipaddress set 192.168.1.101
2 hostname set My
3 lanport 100fdx
4 callstate register
5 lanport get
6 history

Comments
If more than 64 commands have been issued, only the last 64 are displayed,
with the most recent always at the bottom.

4 - 140

System Commands

homecallquality
Sets or gets whether users are allowed to select the bandwidth for calls from
the home screen.

Syntax
homecallquality <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the Call Quality menu on the home screen.

no Removes the Call Quality menu from the home
screen.

Feedback Examples

• homecallquality yes
returns
homecallquality yes

• homecallquality no
returns
homecallquality no

• homecallquality get
returns
homecallquality no

Comments
> Home Screen Settings: Call Quality

4 - 141


homemultipoint
Sets or gets whether users are allowed to access the multipoint dialing screen
via a Multipoint button on the home screen.

Syntax
homemultipoint <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the Multipoint button on the home screen.

no Removes the Multipoint button from the home screen.

Feedback Examples

• homemultipoint yes
returns
homemultipoint yes

• homemultipoint no
returns
homemultipoint no

• homemultipoint get
returns
homemultipoint no

Comments
This option is only available if multipoint calling is enabled.
> Home Screen Settings: Multipoint

4 - 142

System Commands

homerecentcalls
Sets or gets whether users are allowed to access a list of recent calls made with
the system by displaying the Recent Calls button on the home screen.

Syntax
homerecentcalls <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the Recent Calls button on the home screen.

no Removes the Recent Calls button from the home
screen.

Feedback Examples

• homerecentcalls yes
returns
homerecentcalls yes

• homerecentcalls no
returns
homerecentcalls no

• homerecentcalls get
returns
homerecentcalls no

Comments
This option is only available if the Call Detail Report option is enabled.
> Home Screen Settings (page 2): Recent Calls

4 - 143


homesystem
Sets or gets whether users are allowed to access the system screen by
displaying the System button on the home screen.

Syntax
homesystem <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the System button on the home screen.

no Removes the System button from the home screen.

Feedback Examples

• homesystem yes
returns
homesystem yes

• homesystem no
returns
homesystem no

• homesystem get
returns
homesystem no

Comments
> Home Screen Settings: System

4 - 144

System Commands

homesystemname
Sets or gets whether to display the name of the system on the home screen,
above the PIP window.

Syntax
homesystemname <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the system name on the home screen.

no Removes the system name from the home screen.

Feedback Examples

• homesystemname yes
returns
homesystemname yes

• homesystemname no
returns
homesystemname no

• homesystemname get
returns
homesystemname no

Comments
> Home Screen Settings (page 2): System Name

4 - 145


hostname
Sets or gets the LAN host name, which is assigned to the system for TCP/IP
configuration and can be used in place of an IP address when dialing IP calls.

Syntax
hostname get
hostname set [“hostname”]



set Sets the system’s LAN host name when followed by the
“hostname” parameter. If “hostname” is omitted, the
system automatically sets it to Admin.

“hostname” Character string specifying the LAN host name of the
system. The LAN host name follows these format rules:
Starts with a letter (A-a to Z-z). It is not case sensitive.
Ends with a letter (A-a to Z-z) or a number (0 to 9).
May include letters, numbers, and a hyphen.
May not be longer than 63 characters.
Note: The LAN host name is initialized during the
out-of-box setup sequence. The LAN host name is the
same as the system name, if the system name
conforms to the rules above. If the system name does
not conform to these rules, the invalid characters are
removed from the system name. If the resulting string
is empty, the default LAN host name is Admin.

Feedback Examples
• hostname set
returns
hostname ADMIN

• hostname set “My”
returns
hostname My

• hostname get
returns
hostname My

Comments
A LAN host name is required; it cannot be deleted or left blank. After making
a change, you are prompted to restart the system.
Host Name

4 - 146

System Commands

ipaddress
Sets or gets the LAN IP address of the system.

Syntax
ipaddress get
ipaddress set “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”



set Sets the LAN IP address to the “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
parameter. This setting can only be changed when
DHCP is off.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address of the system.

Feedback Examples
• ipaddress set 192.168.1.101
returns
ipaddress 192.168.1.101

• ipaddress get
returns
ipaddress 192.168.1.101

Comments
Use this command when you need to allocate a static IP address to your
system. After making a change, you are prompted to restart the system.
Use the Following IP Address

4 - 147


ipdialspeed
Sets or gets the valid IP dialing speed, and enables or disables the specified
speed.

Syntax
ipdialspeed get “valid speed”
ipdialspeed set “valid speed” <on|off>


get Returns the current setting. The parameter “valid
speed” is required.

192, 224, 256, 280, 320, 33 6, 384, 392, 7x64, 8x56,
504, 512, 560, 576, 616, 640, 672, 704, 728, 768, 784,
832, 840, 16x56, 14x64, 952, 960, 1008, 1024, 1064,
1088, 1120, 1152, 1176, 1216, 1232, 1280, 1288,
24x56, 21x64, 1400, 1408, 1456, 1472, 1512, 1536,
1568, 1600, 1624, 1664, 1680, 1728, 1736, 32x56,
28x64, 1848, 1856, 1904, and 1920 kbps.

set Sets the IP dialing speed. The parameters “valid
speed” and on or off are required.

on Enables the specified speed.

off Disables the specified speed.

Feedback Examples

• ipdialspeed set 168 on
returns
ipdialspeed set 168 on

• ipdialspeed set 168 off
returns
ipdialspeed set 168 off

• ipdialspeed get 168
returns
ipdialspeed 168 off

Comments
Preference (page 3): Preferred Speeds

4 - 148

System Commands

ipisdninfo
Sets or gets whether the home screen displays IP information, ISDN
information, both, or neither.

Syntax
ipisdninfo <get|both|ip-only|isdn-only|none>



both Displays IP and ISDN information on the home screen.

ip-only Displays only IP information on the home screen.

isdn-only Displays only ISDN information on the home screen.

none Does not display any IP or ISDN information on the
home screen.

Feedback Examples

• ipisdninfo ip-only
returns
ipisdninfo ip-only

• ipisdninfo both
returns
ipisdninfo both

• ipisdninfo get
returns
ipisdninfo both

Comments
> Home Screen Settings (page 2): IP or ISDN Information

4 - 149


ipprecaudio, ipprecfecc, ipprecvideo
Sets or gets the IP Precedence priority level (Type of Service Value) for audio,
far-end camera control (FECC), and video. The value for each can be between
0 and 7.

Syntax
ipprecaudio get
ipprecaudio set {0..7}
ipprecfecc get
ipprecfecc set {0..7}
ipprecvideo get
ipprecvideo set {0..7}



set Sets the IP precedence. A priority level is required. This
must be an integer in the range {0..7}.

Feedback Examples

• ipprecaudio set 5
returns
ipprecaudio 5

• ipprecaudio get
returns
ipprecaudio 5

Comments
If typeofservice command on page 4-279 is set to diffserv, these commands
are not applicable.
Quality of Service: Type of Service: IP Precedence and Type of Service
Value

4 - 150

System Commands

ipstat
Returns the LAN host name, WINS resolution, DHCP, IP address, DNS
servers 1-4, default gateway, WINS server, and subnet mask.

Syntax
ipstat

Feedback Examples

• ipstat
returns
hostname My
domainname domain.polycom.com
winsresolution no
dhcp client
ipaddress 192.168.1.101
dnsserver 192.168.1.102
dnsserver1 192.168.1.103
dnsserver2 192.168.1.104
dnsserver3 0.0.0.0
defaultgateway 192.168.1.105
subnetmask 255.255.255.0
winsserver 192.168.1.106
lanport auto
webaccessport 80

Comments
(both pages)

4 - 151


isdnareacode
Sets or gets the ISDN area code or STD code associated with the area where the
system is used. This command is only applicable if you have an ISDN network

Syntax
isdnareacode get
isdnareacode set ["area code"]


get Returns the area code information.

set Sets the ISDN area code when followed by the “area
code” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“area code”.

“area code” Numeric value.

Feedback Examples

• isdnareacode set 700
returns
isdnareacode 700

• isdnareacode get
returns
isdnareacode 700

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Network > ISDN:
Area Code
This screen is only accessible if you have a Quad BRI network interface

4 - 152

System Commands

isdncountrycode
Sets or gets the ISDN country code associated with the country where the
system is used. This command is only applicable if you have an ISDN network

Syntax
isdncountrycode get
isdncountrycode set [“country code”]


get Returns the country code information.

set Sets the ISDN country code when followed by the
“country code” parameter. To erase the current
setting, omit “country code”.

“country code” The ISDN country code.

Feedback Examples

• isdncountrycode set 1
returns
isdncountrycode 1

• isdncountrycode get
returns
isdncountrycode 1

Comments
The system is generally able to automatically determine the country code
based on the country you selected during initial system setup.
> Location: Country Code

4 - 153


isdndialingprefix
Sets or gets the ISDN dialing prefix used to access an outside line if the system
is behind a PBX. This command is only applicable if you have an ISDN

Syntax
isdndialingprefix get
isdndialingprefix set [“isdn prefix”]


get Returns the dialing prefix.

set Sets the ISDN prefix when followed by the “isdn
prefix” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“isdn prefix”.

“isdn prefix” The digit(s) that must be dialed to reach an outside line.

Feedback Examples

• isdndialingprefix set 9
returns
isdndialingprefix 9

• isdndialingprefix get
returns
isdndialingprefix 9

Comments
Outside Line Dialing Prefix

4 - 154

System Commands

isdndialspeed
Sets or gets the valid dialing speed of the ISDN network interface. This
command is only applicable if you have an ISDN network interface connected
to your system.

Syntax
isdndialspeed get “valid speed”
isdndialspeed set “valid speed” <on|off>


get Returns the current setting. The parameter “valid
speed” is required.

set Sets the ISDN dialing speed. The parameters “valid
speed” and on or off are required.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are: 56, 2x56, 112, 168, 224, 280, 336,
392, 64, 8x56, 2x64, 128, 192, 256, 320, 384, 7x64,
512, 560, 576, 616, 640, 672, 704, 728, 768, 784, 832,
840, 14x64, 952, 960, 1008, 1024, 1064, 1088, 1120,
1152, 1176, 1216, 1232, 1280, 1288, 21x64, 1400,
1408, 1456, 1472, 1512, 1536, 1568, 1600, 1624,
1664, 1680, 1728, 28x64, 1856, and 1920 kbps.
Note: The highest speed for BRI systems is 512 kbps,
the highest speed for T1 systems is 1472 kbps, and the
highest speed for E1 systems is 1920 kbps.

on Enables the specified speed.

off Disables the specified speed.

Feedback Examples

• isdndialspeed set 256 on
returns
isdndialspeed set 256 on

• isdndialspeed set 168 off
returns
isdndialspeed set 168 off

• isdndialspeed get 168
returns
isdndialspeed 168 off

Comments
Preference (page 5): Call Speeds

4 - 155


isdnnum
Sets or gets the ISDN video number or numbers assigned to the system. This
command is only applicable if you have an ISDN network interface connected
to your system.

Syntax
isdnnum get <1b1|1b2|2b1|2b2|3b1|3b2|4b1|4b2>
isdnnum set <1b1|1b2|2b1|2b2|3b1|3b2|4b1|4b2> [“number”]


get Returns the current ISDN number associated with the
specified B channel.

set Sets the ISDN number for a B channel line when
followed by the “number” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit “number”.

1b1|1b2|2b1|2b2|3b1| The line and B channel. Valid values are:
3b2|4b1|4b2 1b1 BRI line 1, B channel 1
1b2 BRI line 1, B channel 2

“number” The ISDN number(s) provided by your network service
provider for the specified B channel.

Feedback Examples

• isdnnum set 1b1 “700 555 1212”
returns
isdnnum 1b1 7005551212

• isdnnum get 1b1
returns
isdnnum 1b1 7005551212

Comments
(page 3): Directory Numbers

4 - 156

System Commands

isdnswitch
Sets or gets the ISDN switch protocol. This command is only applicable if you
have an ISDN network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
isdnswitch get
isdnswitch <pt-to-pt_at&t_5_ess|multipoint_at&t_5_ess|ni-1>
isdnswitch <nortel_dms-100|standard_etsi_euro-isdn|ts-031|ntt_ins-64>


get Returns the current switch protocol.

pt-to-pt_at&t_5_ess| Specifies the ISDN switch protocol to use.
multipoint_at&t_5_ess|
ni-1|nortel_dms-100|
standard_etsi_euro-isdn
|ts-031|ntt_ins-64

Feedback Examples

• isdnswitch pt-to-pt_at&t_5_ess
returns
isdnswitch pt-to-pt_at&t_5_ess

• isdnswitch nortel_dms-100
returns
isdnswitch nortel_dms-100

• isdnswitch get
returns
isdnswitch nortel_dms-100

Comments
If more than one switch protocol is supported, you must find out from your
telephone service provider which protocol to select. If you change the country
settings, a new set of ISDN switch protocols is loaded.
ISDN Switch Protocols

See Also
To set the switch type for PRI systems, use the priswitch command on
page 4-219.

4 - 157


keypadaudioconf
Sets or gets the keypad audio confirmation. When this option is enabled, an
audio response is echoed when a numeric key is pressed on the remote control.

Syntax
keypadaudioconf <get|yes|no>



yes Enables audio confirmation.

no Disables audio confirmation.

Feedback Examples

• keypadaudioconf yes
returns
keypadaudioconf yes

• keypadaudioconf no
returns
keypadaudioconf no

• keypadaudioconf get
returns
keypadaudioconf no

Comments
> System Settings > Remote Control: Keypad Audio Confirmation

4 - 158


lanport
Sets or gets the LAN port settings of the system.

Syntax
lanport <get|auto|autohdx|autofdx|10|10hdx|10fdx|100|100hdx|100fdx>



auto|autohdx|autofdx| Sets the LAN speed and duplex mode.
10|10hdx|10fdx|100|10 auto: Automatically negotiates the LAN speed and
0hdx|100fdx duplex mode.
autohdx: Automatically negotiates the LAN speed but
specifies half-duplex mode.
autofdx: Automatically negotiates the LAN speed but
specifies full-duplex mode.
10: 10 Mbps, auto duplex
10hdx: 10 Mbps, half duplex
10fdx: 10 Mbps, full duplex
100: 100 Mbps, auto duplex
100hdx: 100 Mbps, half duplex
100fdx: 100 Mbps, full duplex

Feedback Examples

• lanport auto
returns
lanport auto

• lanport get
returns
lanport auto

Comments
(page 2): LAN Speed and Duplex Mode

4 - 160

System Commands

linestate
Sets or gets API session registration to receive notifications about IP or ISDN
line state changes.

Syntax
linestate get
linestate <register|unregister>



register Registers to receive notification when IP or ISDN line
states change.

unregister Unregisters to receive notification when IP or ISDN line
states change.

Feedback Examples

• linestate register
returns

• linestate unregister
returns

• linestate get
returns

Comments
IP line state changes are only received in a serial API session.

4 - 161


listen
Registers the RS-232 session to listen for incoming video calls, phone calls, or
system sleep or awake state and, consequently, to give notification when the
registered state occurs.

Syntax
listen <video|phone|sleep>


video Instructs the session to listen for incoming video calls.
When this event occurs, the message “listen video
ringing” is received.

phone Instructs the session to listen for incoming phone calls.
When this event occurs, the message “listen phone
ringing” is received.

sleep Instructs the session to listen for when the system goes
into sleep mode. When this event occurs, the message
“listen going to sleep” is received. When the
system wakes up, the message “listen waking up”
is received. Deprecated. Polycom recommends using
sleep register instead of this command.

Feedback Examples

• listen sleep
returns
listen sleep registered
to acknowledge that the session is now registered to listen for sleep mode

• listen phone
returns
listen phone registered
to acknowledge that the session is now registered to listen for incoming
phone calls

• listen video
returns
listen video registered
to acknowledge that the session is now registered to listen for incoming
video calls

4 - 162

System Commands

localdatetime
Sets or gets whether to display the local date and time on the home screen.

Syntax
localdatetime <get|yes|no>



yes Displays the local date and time on the home screen.

no Removes the local date and time from the home
screen.

Feedback Examples

• localdatetime yes
returns
localdatetime yes

• localdatetime no
returns
localdatetime no

• localdatetime get
returns
localdatetime no

Comments
> Home Screen Settings (page 2): Local Date and Time

4 - 163


marqueedisplaytext
Sets or gets the text to display in the dialing entry field on the Place a Call
screen.

Syntax
marqueedisplaytext get
marqueedisplaytext set “text”


get Returns the current marquee display text.

set Sets the text to display in the dialing entry field followed
by the text to use. Enclose the string in quotation marks
if it includes spaces.

“text” Text to display. Enclose the character string in
quotation marks if it includes spaces. If “text” is
omitted, the system automatically sets it to Welcome.

Feedback Examples

• marqueedisplaytext set “Select an entry from the directory.”
returns
marqueedisplaytext “Select an entry from the directory.”

• marqueedisplaytext get
returns
marqueedisplaytext “Select an entry from the directory.”

Comments
This command has an effect only when the dialingdisplay is set to display a
marquee.
> Home Screen Settings: Enter Marquee Text

See Also
The dialing display is specified by the dialingdisplay command on
page 4-71.

4 - 164

System Commands

maxgabinternationalcallspeed
Sets or gets the maximum speed for international ISDN calls made from the
global directory. This command is only applicable if you have an ISDN

Syntax
maxgabinternationalcallspeed get
maxgabinternationalcallspeed set “valid speed”


get Returns the current valid speed.

set Sets the maximum speed for international calls when
followed by a valid speed value.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are: 2x64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024,
and 1472 kbps.

Feedback Examples

• maxgabinternationalcallspeed set 128
returns
maxgabinternationalcallspeed 128

• maxgabinternationalcallspeed get
returns
maxgabinternationalcallspeed 128

Comments
Preference (page 4): International ISDN Calls

4 - 165


maxgabinternetcallspeed
Sets or gets the maximum speed for Internet (IP/H.323) calls made from the
global directory.

Syntax
maxgabinternetcallspeed get
maxgabinternetcallspeed set “valid speed”



set Sets the maximum speed for Internet calls when
followed by a valid speed value.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are: 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, and
1472 kbps.

Feedback Examples

• maxgabinternetcallspeed set 384
returns
maxgabinternetcallspeed 384

• maxgabinternetcallspeed get
returns
maxgabinternetcallspeed 384

Comments
Preference (page 3): IP Calls

4 - 166

System Commands

maxgabisdncallspeed
Sets or gets the maximum speed for ISDN (H.320) calls made from the global
directory. This command is only applicable if you have an ISDN network

Syntax
maxgabisdncallspeed get
maxgabisdncallspeed set “valid speed”



set Sets the maximum speed for ISDN calls when followed
by a valid speed value.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are: 56, 64, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768,
1024, and 1472 kbps.

Feedback Examples

• maxgabisdncallspeed set 384
returns
maxgabisdncallspeed 384

• maxgabisdncallspeed get
returns
maxgabisdncallspeed 384

Comments
Preference (page 4): ISDN Video Calls (H.320)

4 - 167


maxtimeincall
Sets or gets the maximum number of minutes allowed for call length.

Syntax
maxtimeincall get
maxtimeincall set [{0..999}]



set Sets the maximum time for calls when followed by a
parameter from {0..999}. To erase the current
setting, omit the time parameter or set it to 0. The call
will then stay up indefinitely.

{0..999} Maximum call time in minutes. Must be an integer in
the range {0..999}.

Feedback Examples

• maxtimeincall set
returns
maxtimeincall <empty>

• maxtimeincall set 180
returns
maxtimeincall 180

• maxtimeincall get
returns
maxtimeincall 180

Comments
When the time has expired in a call, a message asks you if you want to hang
up or stay in the call. If you do not answer within one minute, the call
automatically disconnects.
> System Settings > Call Settings: Maximum Time in Call

4 - 168

System Commands

mcupassword
Enters and sends the MCU password to the MCU.

Syntax
mcupassword [“password”]


password Specifies the password to send to the MCU.

4 - 169


meetingpassword
Sets or gets the meeting password.

Syntax
meetingpassword get
meetingpassword set [“password”]


get Returns the current meeting password.

set Sets the meeting password if followed by the password
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit the
password parameter.

“password” User-defined password. Valid characters are: A
through Z (lower and uppercase), -, _, @, /, ;, ,, .,
, and 0 through 9. The length is limited to 10
characters. The password cannot include spaces.

Feedback Examples

• meetingpassword set psswd
returns
meetingpassword psswd

• meetingpassword get
returns
meetingpassword psswd

• meetingpassword set “My psswd”
returns

Comments
> Security: Meeting

4 - 170

System Commands

midrangespeaker
Sets or gets whether to use the system’s built-in midrange speaker. (VSX 7000,
VSX 7000s, and VSX 6000 only)

Syntax
midrangespeaker <get|on|off>



on Turns the midrange speaker on.

off Turns the midrange speaker off.

Feedback Examples
• midrangespeaker on
returns
midrangespeaker on

• midrangespeaker off
returns
midrangespeaker off

• midrangespeaker get
returns
midrangespeaker off

Comments
This option is only available when Polycom StereoSurround is disabled.
Midrange Speaker

4 - 171


monitor1 (deprecated)
Sets or gets the aspect ratio for Monitor 1. With the implementation of the
configdisplay command on page 4-51, this command has been deprecated.

Syntax
monitor1 <get|4:3|16:9|vga>



4:3|16:9 Sets the display aspect ratio to 4:3 (standard) or 16:9
(wide screen).

vga Sets the display to VGA and causes the system to
restart.

Feedback Examples

• monitor1 4:3
returns
monitor1 4:3

• monitor1 16:9
returns
monitor1 16:9

• monitor1 get
returns
monitor1 16:9

Comments
Monitors: Monitor

See Also
See the configdisplay command on page 4-51.

4 - 172

System Commands

monitor1screensaveroutput
Sets or gets whether to send either black video or "No Signal" to Monitor 1
when the screen saver activates.

Syntax
monitor1screensaveroutput <get|black|no_signal>



black Sends black video to Monitor 1 when the system goes
to sleep and the screen saver activates.

no_signal Sends no signal to Monitor 1 when the system goes to
sleep and the screen saver activates.

Feedback Examples

• monitor1screensaveroutput black
returns
monitor1screensaveroutput black

• monitor1screensaveroutput no_signal
returns
monitor1screensaveroutput no_signal

• monitor1screensaveroutput get
returns

Comments
Monitors

See Also
See the monitor2screensaveroutput command on page 4-175.

4 - 173


monitor2 (deprecated)
Sets or gets the aspect ratio for Monitor 2. With the implementation of the
configdisplay command on page 4-51, this command has been deprecated.

Syntax
monitor2 off
monitor2 <get|4:3|16:9>
monitor2 vga


off Disables the second monitor output.


4:3|16:9 Sets the aspect ratio to 4:3 (standard) or 16:9 (wide
screen).

vga Sets the display to VGA.

Feedback Examples

• monitor2 off
returns
monitor2 off

• monitor2 16:9
returns
monitor2 16:9

• monitor2 get
returns
monitor2 16:9

Comments
Monitors: Monitor 2

See Also
See the configdisplay command on page 4-51.

4 - 174

System Commands

monitor2screensaveroutput
Sets or gets whether to send either black video or "No Signal" to Monitor 2
when the screen saver activates.

Syntax
monitor2screensaveroutput <get|black|no_signal>


black Sends black video to Monitor 2 when the system goes
to sleep and the screen saver activates.

no_signal Sends no signal to Monitor 2 when the system goes to
sleep and the screen saver activates.


Feedback Examples

• monitor2screensaveroutput black
returns
monitor2screensaveroutput black

• monitor2screensaveroutput no_signal
returns

• monitor2screensaveroutput get
returns

Comments
Monitors

See Also
See the monitor1screensaveroutput command on page 4-173.

4 - 175


mpautoanswer
Sets or gets the Auto Answer Multipoint mode, which determines how the
system will handle an incoming call in a multipoint video conference.

Syntax
mpautoanswer <get|yes|no|donotdisturb>



yes Connects incoming video calls automatically. The
screen will split into a multipoint call progress screen as
the incoming call is answered.

no For an incoming video call, the user will be notified and
given the choice to answer the call. If the user selects
Yes, the call is added to the ongoing conference. If the
user selects No, the call is rejected. The default is No.

donotdisturb The user is not notified of incoming video calls. The
sites that placed the calls receive a Far Site Busy
(H.320) or Call Rejected (H.323) code.

Feedback Examples

• mpautoanswer yes
returns
mpautoanswer yes

• mpautoanswer no
returns
mpautoanswer no

• mpautoanswer get
returns
mpautoanswer no

• mpautoanswer donotdisturb
returns
mpautoanswer donotdisturb

Comments
If mpautoanswer is set to no or donotdisturb, you must rely on API session
notifications to answer inbound calls.
> System Settings > Call Settings: Auto Answer Multipoint or
System > User Settings: Auto Answer Multipoint

4 - 176

System Commands

mpmode
Sets or gets the multipoint conference viewing mode for the system in a
multipoint call. The multipoint mode can be set to auto, discussion,
presentation, or fullscreen. By default, it is set to auto.

Syntax
mpmode <get|auto|discussion|presentation|fullscreen>



auto In Auto mode, the system switches between Full
Screen Mode and Discussion mode, depending on the
interaction between the sites. If one site is talking
uninterrupted for 15 seconds or more, the speaker
appears full screen.

presentation In Presentation mode, the person who is speaking
appears full screen to the far sites, while the person
who is speaking sees all the other sites on a split
screen.

discussion In Discussion mode (also called Continuous Presence
mode), every site sees all the sites in the meeting at
the same time, on a split screen.

fullscreen In Full Screen mode, every site in the call sees the
current speaker, or the latest person to speak, on the
full screen.

Feedback Examples
• mpmode auto
returns
mpmode auto

• mpmode discussion
returns
mpmode discussion

• mpmode get
returns
mpmode discussion

Comments
This option is not available unless the multipoint option is enabled.
What you see during a multipoint call can depend on many factors such as the
system’s monitor configuration, the number of sites in the call, whether
content is shared, and whether dual monitor emulation is used.
Multipoint Setup: Multipoint Mode

4 - 177


mtumode
Sets or gets the MTU mode. The mtumode and mtusize commands allow you to
change the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size, to adjust for the best
interoperability with the host network. Set mtumode to specify, then use
mtusize to specify a value. If mtumode is set to default, the system automatically
sets the MTU value to 1260.

Syntax
mtumode <get|default|specify>



default Sets the Maximum Transmission Unit size to the
default value of 1260.

specify Allows you to specify a Maximum Transmission Unit
size other than the default setting.

Feedback Examples
• mtumode default
returns
mtumode default

• mtumode specify
returns
mtumode specify

• mtumode get
returns
mtumode specify

• mtusize 660
returns
mtusize 660

• mtumode foo
returns

Comments
Quality of Service: Maximum Transmission Unit Size

See Also
See also the related mtusize command on page 4-179.

4 - 178

System Commands

mtusize
Sets or gets the MTU size. The mtumode and mtusize commands allow you to
change the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size, to adjust for the best
interoperability with the host network. Set mtumode to specify, then use
mtusize to specify a value. If mtumode is set to default, the system automatically
sets the MTU value to 1260.

Syntax
mtusize <get|660|780|900|1020|1140|1260|1500>



660|780|900|1020| Sets the value of the Maximum Transmission Unit size.
1140|1260|1500

Feedback Examples
• mtumode specify
returns
mtumode specify

• mtusize 660
returns
mtusize 660

• mtusize 1140
returns
mtusize 1140

• mtusize get
returns
mtusize 1140

Comments
Quality of Service: Maximum Transmission Unit Size

See Also
See also the related mtumode command on page 4-178.

4 - 179


mute
Sets or gets the near or far site mute settings.

Syntax
mute <register|unregister>
mute near <get|on|off|toggle>
mute far get


register Registers to receive notification when the mute mode
changes.

unregister Disables register mode.

near Sets the command for the near site. Requires on, off,
toggle, or get.

get Returns the current setting for the near or far site.

on Mutes the near site (mute near on).

off Unmutes the near site (mute near off).

toggle If mute near mode is mute near on, this switches to
mute near off, and vice versa.

far Returns the mute state of the far site system. Requires
the parameter get.

Feedback Examples
• mute register
returns
mute registered
• mute near on
returns
mute near on

• mute far get
returns
mute far off

Comments
In register mode, the system sends notification to the API session when the far
or near site is muted or unmuted.

4 - 180

System Commands

muteautoanswer
Sets or gets the Mute Auto Answer Calls mode. When this setting is selected,
the microphone is muted to prevent the far site from hearing the near site
when the system answers automatically.

Syntax
muteautoanswer <get|yes|no>



yes Enables Mute Auto Answer Calls mode. The
microphone will be muted when the system receives a
call while in Auto Answer mode.

no Disables Mute Auto Answer Calls mode. The
microphone will not be muted when the system
receives a call while in Auto Answer mode.

Feedback Examples
• muteautoanswer yes
returns
muteautoanswercalls yes

• muteautoanswer no
returns
muteautoanswercalls no

• muteautoanswer get
returns
muteautoanswercalls no

Comments
User interface screen location: System > User Settings: Mute Auto Answer
Calls

4 - 181


natconfig
Sets or gets the NAT configuration.

Syntax
natconfig <get|auto|manual|upnp|off>



auto Specifies that the system is behind a NAT; specifies
that the system will automatically discover the public
(WAN) address.

manual Specifies that the system is behind a NAT. Requires the
WAN address to be assigned using the
wanipaddress command on page 4-307.

upnp Specifies that the system is behind a firewalled NAT
router that is UPnP certified.

off Disables the option when the system is not behind a
NAT.

Feedback Examples
• natconfig auto
returns
natconfig auto

• natconfig manual
returns
natconfig manual

• natconfig off
returns
natconfig off

• natconfig get
returns
natconfig off

Comments
Firewall: NAT Configuration

4 - 182

System Commands

nath323compatible
Sets or gets the NAT is H.323 Compatible setting.

Syntax
nath323compatible <get|yes|no>



yes Specifies that NAT is capable of translating H.323
traffic.

no Specifies that NAT is not capable of translating H.323
traffic.

Feedback Examples
• nath323compatible yes
returns
nath323compatible yes

• nath323compatible no
returns
nath323compatible no

• nath323compatible get
returns
nath323compatible no

Comments
Firewall: NAT is H.323 Compatible
This setting is only applicable when NAT Configuration is set to Auto,
Manual, or UPnP.

4 - 183


nearloop
Activates or deactivates the Near End Loop test.

Syntax
nearloop <on|off>


on Activates the Near End Loop, a complete internal test
of the system.

off Deactivates the Near End Loop.

Feedback Examples

• nearloop on
returns
nearloop on
cs: call[41] chan[0] dialstr[] state[ALLOCATED]

• nearloop off
returns
nearloop off
cleared: call[41]
dialstring[IP: NAME:]
ended: call[41]

Comments
When Near End Loop is on, you can test the encoder/decoder on the system.
This can help you diagnose a problem with a video call. If you perform a near
end loop test during a call, the far site sees a loop of itself.
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Network: Near End
Loop

4 - 184

System Commands

netstats
Returns network statistics for each call.

Syntax
netstats [{0..n}]


{0..n} Call in a multipoint call, where n is the maximum
number of calls supported by the system. 0 is the first
site connected. If no call is specified, netstats returns
information about the near site.

Feedback Examples
• netstats 2
returns
call:1 txrate:128 K rxrate:128 K pktloss:0 %pktloss:0.0 % tvp:H.263
rvp:H.263 tvf:CIF rvp:CIF tap:G.722.1 rap:G.722.1 tcp:H.323
rcp:H.323
where:
txrate=transmit clock rate
rxrate=receive clock rate
pktloss=number of packet loss/errors
%pktloss=percentage of packet loss/errors
tvp=transmit video protocol
rvp=receive video protocol
tvf=transmit video format
rvf=receive video format
tap=transmit audio protocol
rap=receive audio protocol
tcp=transmit comm protocol
rcp=receive comm protocol

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Call Statistics (page 2)

4 - 185


nonotify
Unregisters the API client to receive status notifications.

Syntax
nonotify <callstatus|captions|linestatus|mutestatus|screenchanges>
nonotify <sysstatus|sysalerts|vidsourcechanges>


callstatus Stops the system from receiving changes in call status,
such as a connection or disconnection.

captions Stops the system from capturing closed captions as they
appear on the screen.

linestatus Stops the system from receiving line status notifications.

mutestatus Stops the system from receiving changes in audio mute
status.

screenchanges Stops the system from receiving notification when a user
interface screen is displayed.

sysstatus Stops the system from receiving system status
notifications.

sysalerts Stops the system from receiving system alerts.

vidsourcechanges Stops the system from receiving notification of camera
source changes.

Feedback Examples
• nonotify callstatus
returns
nonotify callstatus success
acknowledging that the session is no longer registered to receive callstatus
notifications
• If entered again,
nonotify callstatus
returns
info: event/notification not active:callstatus

See Also
See also the related notify command on page 4-187.

4 - 186

System Commands

notify
Lists the notification types that are currently being received, or registers to
receive status notifications.

Syntax
notify
notify <callstatus|captions|linestatus|mutestatus|screenchanges>
notify <sysstatus|sysalerts|vidsourcechanges>


notify Lists the notification types that are currently being
received, in the following format.
registered for <num>
notifications[:notification type>...]

callstatus Registers the system to receive changes in call status,
such as a connection or disconnection, in the following
format.
notification:callstatus:<call
direction>:<call id>:<far site name>:<far
site number>:<connection status>:<call
speed>:<status-specific cause code from call
engine>:<calltype>

captions Registers the system to capture closed captions as
they appear on the screen, in the following format.
notification:caption:<“caption string”>

linestatus Registers the system to receive line status notifications
as they occur, in the following format:
notification:linestatus:<direction>:
<call id>:<line id>:<channel id>:
<connection status>

mutestatus Registers the system to receive changes in audio mute
status, in the following format.
notification:mutestatus:<near or far>:<call
id>:<site name>:<site number>:<mute status>

screenchanges Registers the system to receive notification when a
user interface screen is displayed, in the following
format.
notification:screenchange:<screen
name>:<screen def name>

4 - 187



sysstatus Registers the system to receive system status
notifications, in the following format.
notification:sysstatus:<sys parameter
name>:<value1>[:<value2>...]

sysalerts Registers the system to receive system alerts, in the
following format.
notification:sysalert:<alert
name>:<value1>[:<value2>...]

vidsourcechanges Registers the system to receive notification of camera
source changes, in the following format.
notification:vidsourcechange:<near or
far>:<camera index>:<camera name>:<people or
content>

Feedback Examples

• notify mutestatus
returns
notify mutestatus success
acknowledging that the session is now registered to receive mutestatus
notifications

• notify callstatus
returns
notify callstatus success
acknowledging that the session is now registered to receive callstatus
notifications
notify callstatus
returns
info: event/notification already active:callstatus

• notify
returns
registered for 2 notifications:mutestatus:callstatus

The following are examples of notifications that may be returned after
registering to receive them.

• notification:callstatus:outgoing:34:Polycom VSX
Demo:192.168.1.101:connected:384:0:videocall
in the format
• notification:mutestatus:near:near:near:near:muted

• notification:screenchange:systemsetup:systemsetup_a

• notification:vidsourcechange:near:1:Main:people

4 - 188

System Commands

• notification:linestatus:outgoing:32:0:0:disconnected

• notification:vidsourcechange:near:6:ppcip:content

• notification:vidsourcechange:near:none:none:content

Comments
The notify callstatus command registers the current API session for call
status notifications. The API client receives call status notifications as a call
progresses.
Registration for status notifications is session-specific. For example,
registering for alerts in a Telnet session does not return alerts in a
simultaneous RS-232 session with the same system.
The notify captions command registers the current API session to receive
notifications as closed captions are displayed. If closed captions are dropped
for some reason, no notification is received. This command is typically used
for capturing captions being displayed for archival purpose.
Duplicate registrations produce another success response. The notify setting
remains in effect, even if you restart the system or update the software with
system settings saved.

See Also
See also the related nonotify command on page 4-186 and callinfo

4 - 189


ntpmode
Sets or gets the mode of the system’s Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
NTP server time is used to ensure synchronized time data in the local Call
Detail Report.

Syntax
ntpmode <get|auto|off|manual>


get Returns the current time server mode.

auto Automatically selects an NTP server from the Internet.

off Turns off the use of an NTP server.

manual Lets you specify a server using the ntpserver

Feedback Examples
• ntpmode auto
returns
ntpmode auto

• ntpmode off
returns
ntpmode off

• ntpmode manual
returns
ntpmode manual

• ntpmode get
returns
ntpmode manual

Comments
H.323 Settings > NTP Setup

See Also
See the ntpserver command on page 4-191.

4 - 190

System Commands

ntpserver
Sets or gets an Network Time Protocol (NTP) server, using the IP address or
the DNS name of the server.

Syntax
ntpserver get
ntpserver set [“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”|“server name”]


get Gets the IP address of the NTP server.

set Sets the IP address of the NTP server when followed
by a valid parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
the [“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”|“server name”]
parameter.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” The IP address of the NTP server.

“server name” The DNS name of the NTP server.

Feedback Examples
• ntpserver set
returns
ntpserver <empty>

• ntpserver set 192.168.1.205
returns
ntpserver 192.168.1.205

• ntpserver get
returns
ntpserver 192.168.1.205

Comments
This command allows you to use an internal time server and thus synchronize
the system’s time with the time on your internal network. The system uses this
time only for the local Call Detail Report.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > General Settings>
Location > Date and Time (page 2): Time Server

4 - 191


numberofmonitors (deprecated)
Returns the number of display monitors configured. With the implementation
of the configdisplay command on page 4-51, this command has been
deprecated.

Syntax
numberofmonitors get

Feedback Examples
• numberofmonitors get
returns
numberofmonitors 1
when one monitor is configured for display
• numberofmonitors get
returns
numberofmonitors 2
when two monitors are configured for display

Comments
Monitors

See Also
The recommended command for accessing display configuration is the
configdisplay command on page 4-51. For example, to determine the state of
Monitor 2, use configdisplay monitor2 get.

4 - 192

System Commands

numberofrouterhops
Sets or gets the maximum number of router hops for streaming.

Syntax
numberofrouterhops get
numberofrouterhops set {1..127}



set {1..127} Sets the value for the maximum number of router hops.

Feedback Examples
• numberofrouterhops set 121
returns
numberofrouterhops 121

• numberofrouterhops get
returns
numberofrouterhops 121

• numberofrouterhops set
returns
error: command needs more parameters to execute successfully

Comments
Streaming: Number of Router Hops

4 - 193


numdigitsdid
Sets or gets the number of digits in the DID Gateway number (E.164 dialing).

Syntax
numdigitsdid <get|{0..24}>



{0..24} Specifies the number of digits in DID numbers.

Feedback Examples
• numdigitsdid 7
returns
numdigitsdid 7

• numdigitsdid get
returns
numdigitsdid 7

Comments
The number of digits in the DID is that portion of the full DID that the Gateway
will be given from the ISDN service provider as the Called Party Line
Identifier. This, in turn, will be passed to the Gatekeeper for address
resolution.
H.323 Settings (page 3): Number of Digits in DID Number
For this option to be available, the Gateway Number Type on the same page
must be set to Direct Inward Dial.

4 - 194

System Commands

numdigitsext
Sets or gets the number of digits in the Number+Extension Gateway number
(E.164 dialing).

Syntax
numdigitsext <get|{0..24}>



{0..24} The number of digits in the gateway number if
gatewaynumbertype is set to number+extension.

Feedback Examples
• numdigitsext 10
returns
numdigitsext 10

• numdigitsext get
returns
numdigitsext 10

Comments
The number of digits in that number is that portion of the full
Number+Extension number that the Gateway will be given from the ISDN
service provider as the Called Party Line Identifier. This, in turn, will be
passed to the Gatekeeper for address resolution.
H.323 Settings (page 3): Number of Digits in Extension

4 - 195


overlayname
Sets or gets the video overlay name setting on the system.

Syntax
overlayname get
overlayname set “name”



set Sets the overlay name setting.

“name” User-defined name to display on the overlay. The
overlay name is limited to 20 characters. Enclose the
character string in quotation marks if it includes spaces.
Enter “” (an empty string) for “name” to remove text
from the overlay.

Feedback Examples
• overlayname set “Maximum Security”
returns
overlayname “Maximum Security”

• overlayname get
returns
overlayname “Maximum Security”

• overlayname set “”
returns
overlayname “”

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > General Settings >
System Settings > Appearance

4 - 196

System Commands

overlaytheme
Sets or gets the video overlay theme setting on the system.

Syntax
overlaytheme get
overlaytheme set <0|1|2|3|4|5>



set Sets the overlay theme setting.

0|1|2|3|4|5 The overlay theme set on the site, as follows:
• 0 — None
• 1 — Green
• 2 — Blue
• 3 — Red
• 4 — Orange
• 5 — Yellow

Feedback Examples
• overlaytheme set 3
returns
overlaytheme 3
and sets the video overlay theme color in the user interface to red
• overlaytheme get
returns
overlaytheme 3

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > General Settings >
System Settings > Appearance

4 - 197


pause
Pauses the command interpreter before executing the next command. Pauses
are useful when commands are retrieved from a script file.

Syntax
pause {0..65535}


{0..65535} Number of seconds to pause.

Feedback Examples
• pause 3
returns
pausing for 3 seconds

• pause 0
returns
pausing for 0 seconds

4 - 198

System Commands

phone
Flashes the analog phone line.

Syntax
phone <clear|flash>


clear Clears phone number from the text box.

flash Sends flash hook to a POTS or VTX 1000 conference
phone connection. If both of these call types exist, use
the flash command to specify a call ID.

See Also
Use the flash command on page 4-102 to specify a call ID.

4 - 199


ping
Pings the IP address of a device, to check if it can be reached.

Syntax
ping “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” [“count”]


“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address of the device.

“count” Optional parameter defining the number of times the
device is to be pinged. The default is 1.

Feedback Examples
• ping 192.168.1.101
returns
testlan ping 192.168.1.101: passed = 1; failed = 0
where the number of passed attempts is 1 and the number of failed attempts is 0
• ping 192.168.1.101 23
returns
testlan ping 192.168.1.101: passed = 23; failed = 0
where the number of passed attempts is 23 and the number of failed attempts is 0

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Network: PING

4 - 200

System Commands

pip
Sets or gets the on-screen PIP mode. The PIP feature allows the near site to
adjust near-camera views while in a video conference.

Syntax
pip <get|on|off|auto|camera|swap|register|unregister|location>
pip location <get|0|1|2|3>



on Enables PIP mode. The system shows a PIP window
that remains in the lower right corner of the screen until
the video call is completed.

off Disables PIP mode.

auto Causes the system to show a PIP window when the
call is first connected and when the remote control is
not resting on a flat surface.

camera Causes the PIP window to appear when the selected
camera position is changed. The PIP window
disappears when the camera has finished moving.

swap Toggles the content of the PIP and the main display
between the near-site and far-site view.

register Registers the system to give notification when PIP is
turned on or off.

unregister Unregisters the system to give notification when PIP is
turned on or off.

location Places the PIP window in the specified corner of the
screen:
0 = bottom right corner
1 = top right corner
2 = top left corner
3 = bottom left corner
get = Returns the current location

Feedback Examples
• pip on
returns
pip on
• pip swap
returns
pip swapped

4 - 201


• pip location get
returns
pip location 1

• pip register
returns
pip registered

Comments
Monitors: PIP
or
System > User Settings (page 2): PIP
The Allow Access to User Settings option under System > Admin Settings >
General Settings > Security (page 2) must be checked for the User Settings
option to be available.

4 - 202

System Commands

popupinfo
Registers or unregisters the session to receive popup text and button choices
text.

Syntax
popupinfo <get|register|unregister>


register Registers to receive popup information.

unregister Unregisters to receive popup information.


Feedback Examples
• popupinfo register
returns

• popupinfo unregister
returns

• popupinfo get
returns

The following examples show notifications that may be returned after
registering to receive popup text and button choices text.
• popupinfo: question: Sorry. Cannot dial number because you are
already in a call with the site.

• popupinfo: choice0: Ok
is returned if a call fails

• popupinfo: question: Save Changes?
popupinfo: choice0: Yes
popupinfo: choice1: No
popupinfo: answered: Yes
is returned if the user edits the password field

4 - 203


preset
Sets or gets the presets or goes (moves) to the presets for the near or far camera
source. Also registers or unregisters the API session to give notification when
the user sets or goes to presets.

Syntax
preset <register|unregister>
preset register get
preset far <go|set> <{0..15}>
preset near <go|set> <{0..99}>


register Registers the system to give notification when the user or
far site sets or goes to a preset. Returns the current
preset registration state when followed by the get
parameter.


far Specifies the far camera. Requires a set or go parameter
and a preset identifier.

go Moves the camera to a camera preset. Requires a
“preset” parameter.

set Sets a camera preset. Requires a “preset” parameter.

{0..15}, {0..99} Camera preset identifier. Must be an integer in the range
{0..15} for a far-site camera or {0..99} for a near-site
camera.

near Specifies the near camera. Requires a set or go
parameter and a preset identifier.

Feedback Examples
• preset register
returns
preset registered
• preset near go 1
returns
preset near go 1
and moves the near-site camera to the preset 1 position
• preset near set 2
returns
preset near set 2
and saves the current location/position of the near-site camera as preset 2

Comments
Up to 100 preset camera positions can be set. These camera presets can be
distributed across the far camera and up to four near-site cameras.

4 - 204

System Commands

priareacode
Sets or gets the PRI area code. This command is only applicable if you have a
PRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
priareacode get
priareacode set ["area code"]



set Sets the PRI area code when followed by the “area
code” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
“area code”.

“area code” Numeric string specifying the area code.

Feedback Examples
• priareacode set 700
returns
priareacode 700

• priareacode get
returns
priareacode 700

Comments
Area Code
This screen is only accessible if you have a PRI network interface connected to
your system.

4 - 205


pricallbycall
Sets or gets the PRI call-by-call value. This command is only applicable if you
have a PRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
pricallbycall get
pricallbycall set {0..31}



set Sets PRI call-by-call when followed by a value from
{0..31}.

{0..31} Range of call-by-call values.

Feedback Examples
• pricallbycall set 1
returns
pricallbycall 1

• pricallbycall get
returns
pricallbycall 1

Comments
Call-by-call is a number from 0 to 31, which is optionally sent to an upstream
telephone company switch, if required. For example, specify a value of 6 for a
T1 PRI network interface module that is directly connected to an ATT 5ESS
switch, which is provisioned with Accunet. You must consult with the
telephone company service provider to determine whether a call-by-call value
is required for a particular PRI line. For most cases, the default value of 0 is
correct. Always use the value 0 when connected to a PBX. A non-zero value
should not be required in Europe. Values greater than 31 are reserved for
internal use and must not be used.
(page 3): Call-by-Call
your system.

4 - 206

System Commands

prichannel
Sets or gets the PRI channels that will be active for the PRI line. This command
is only applicable if you have a PRI network interface connected to your
system.

Syntax
prichannel get all
prichannel get {1..n}
prichannel set all
prichannel set {1..n} <on|off>


get Returns the current setting. Requires a parameter from
<all|{1..n}>.

all Selects all PRI channels and returns all channels and
settings similar to briallenable.

{1..n} Range of available PRI channels. For PRI T1, the
range is 1..23. For PRI E1, the range is 1..30.

set Sets the PRI channels to be active when followed by a
parameter from <all|{1..n}> and from <on|off>.

on Activates the selected PRI channels.

off Disables the selected PRI channels.

Feedback Examples
• prichannel 1 set on
returns
prichannel 1 on
• prichannel set 23 off
returns
prichannel 23 off

• prichannel get 23
returns
prichannel 23 off

Comments
(page 5): Active Channels
your system.

4 - 207


Important PRI Channel Information
Outgoing Call. For an outgoing call, the system uses the first active and
available channel starting with the lowest number from the channel range
(1-23 for a PRI T1 and 1-30 for a PRI E1). If an additional channel is needed, the
system chooses the next incremental number. For example, if channels 1
through 7 are inactive, but 8 is active and available, then 8 is the first channel
that can be used by the system to place an outgoing call. If an additional
channel is needed, the system will use the next available active channel in the
range (which could be 9, and so on).
Incoming Calls. For incoming calls, the system may use the highest numbered
channel in the range and, if needed, proceed to the next channel number in
descending order, depending on the type of third-party equipment attached to
the system. For example, an incoming call arrives on channel 23, then 22, 21,
and so on.
Dedicated full PRI T1 or E1 Line. All channels should be active for a full T1
or E1 line dedicated to your system.
Fractional PRI T1 or E1. Channel selection should be handled by your PRI
network administrator.
PRI E1 Channel Information. The PRI Status screen (for E1) shows 30
channels. However, E1 trunk lines have 32 timeslots, numbered 0 - 31.
Timeslot 0 is used for framing, and timeslot 16 is used for call signaling (the D
channel). The remaining 30 timeslots are used as bearer (data) channels. In call
signaling between our equipment and the switch, these channels are
numbered 1-15, 17-31. But the PRI Status screen numbers these channels
contiguously in the range 1-30. Therefore, on the PRI Status screen, channels
1-15 control the status of timeslots 1-15, and channels 16-30 control the status
of timeslots 17-31.

4 - 208

System Commands

pricsu
Sets or gets the PRI CSU mode for a T1 interface.

Syntax
pricsu <get|internal|external>



internal Sets the internal CSU mode. This is the default.

external Sets the external CSU mode. When selected, you must
specify the PRI line buildout.

Feedback Examples
• pricsu internal
returns
pricsu internal

• pricsu external
returns
pricsu external

• pricsu get
returns
pricsu external

Comments
By default, the T1 PRI network interface module is set for internal CSU mode.
(page 2): External CSU
your system.

See Also
The PRI line buildout for a T1 interface is set using the prilinebuildout

4 - 209


pridialchannels
Sets or gets the number of PRI channels to dial in parallel. This command is
only applicable if you have a PRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
pridialchannels get
pridialchannels set {1..n}


set Sets the number of PRI channels to be dialed in
parallel when followed by a parameter from {1..n}. To
erase the current setting, omit the parameter.

get Returns the current number of channels dialed in
parallel.

{1..n} Range of numbers of PRI channels that can be dialed
in parallel. For PRI T1, the range is 1..12. For PRI E1,
the range is 1..15.

Feedback Examples
• pridialchannels set 3
returns
pridialchannels 3

• pridialchannels get
returns
pridialchannels 3

Comments
By default, ISDN channels are dialed three at a time. On PRI systems, you can
choose the number of channels to dial in parallel.
(page 3): Number of Channels to Dial in Parallel
your system.

4 - 210

System Commands

priintlprefix
Sets or gets the PRI international dialing prefix.

Syntax
priintlprefix get
priintlprefix set ["prefix"]



set Sets the PRI international dialing prefix when followed
by the parameter “prefix”. To erase the current
setting, omit the parameter.

“prefix” Numeric string.

Feedback Examples
• priintlprefix set 011
returns
priintlprefix 011

• priintlprefix get
returns
priintlprefix 011

Comments
The international prefix defaults to 011 for North America and 00 for European
countries. The default depends on the country.
(page 3): International Dialing Prefix
your system.

4 - 211


prilinebuildout
Sets or gets the PRI line buildout for a T1 interface.

Syntax
prilinebuildout get
prilinebuildout set <0|-7.5|-15|-22.5>
prilinebuildout set <0-133|134-266|267-399|400-533|534-665>



set Sets the PRI line buildout. It requires an output
“attenuation in dB” or an “attenuation in
feet”.

0|-7.5|-15|-22.5 Output attenuation values in dB. For internal CSUs.

0-133|134-266| Output attenuation values in feet. For external CSUs.
267-399|400-533|
534-665

Feedback Examples
• prilinebuildout set -7.5
returns
prilinebuildout -7.5

• prilinebuildout get
returns
prilinebuildout -7.5

Comments
If you are using an internal CSU, enter the output attenuation in dB. If you are
using an external CSU, enter the output attenuation in feet.
(page 3): Line Build Out

See Also
The PRI CSU mode for a T1 interface is set using the pricsu command on
page 4-209.

4 - 212

System Commands

prilinesignal
Sets or gets the PRI line signal.

Syntax
prilinesignal get
prilinesignal set <esf/b8zs|crc4/hdb3|hdb3>


get Returns the current PRI line signal setting.

set Sets the PRI line signal. It requires one of the following
parameters: esf/b8zs, crc4/hdb3, hdb3

esf/b8zs A method of signal encoding used with a T1 interface.
This is the only choice for T1. This value actually
chooses both a framing format and an encoding
method. Legacy frame formats, such as D4, are not
supported. In addition, older encoding methods, such
as B7ZS, are not supported.

crc4/hdb3 A method of signal encoding used with an E1 interface.
This is the default value. Data is encoded using HDB3
to ensure proper one-density, and CRC4 error checking
is enabled on both transmit and receive.

hdb3 A method of signal encoding used with an E1 interface.
CRC4 error checking is disabled.

Feedback Examples
• prilinesignal set esf/b8zs
returns
prilinesignal esf/b8zs
• prilinesignal get
returns
prilinesignal esf/b8zs

Comments
(page 2): Line Signaling
your system.

4 - 213


primarycallchoice
Sets or gets the primary call type for placing calls.

Syntax
primarycallchoice <get|isdn|ip|sip>


get Returns the current primary call type.

isdn Sets the primary call type to ISDN.

ip Sets the primary call type to IP.

sip Sets the primary call type to SIP.

Feedback Examples
• primarycallchoice ip
returns
primarycalltype ip

• primarycallchoice get
returns
primarycalltype ip

Comments
Preference (page 2)

See Also
You can set the secondary call type using the secondarycallchoice

4 - 214

System Commands

primarycamera
Sets or gets the primary camera that is used when the system powers on.

Syntax
primarycamera <get|1|2|3>



1|2|3 Selects the camera to use as the primary video source.

Feedback Examples
• primarycamera 1
returns
primarycamera 1

• primarycamera get
returns
primarycamera 1

Comments
You cannot disconnect the main camera, but you do not have to set it as the
primary camera.
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Cameras: Primary
Camera

4 - 215


prinumber
Sets or gets the PRI video number.

Syntax
prinumber get
prinumber set ["number"]



set Sets the PRI video number when followed by the
parameter “number”. To erase the current setting, omit
the parameter.

“number” Numeric string. This number is provided by your
network service provider.

Feedback Examples
• prinumber set 5551212
returns
prinumber 5551212

• prinumber get
returns
prinumber 5551212

Comments
PRI Video Number
your system.

4 - 216

System Commands

prinumberingplan
Sets or gets the PRI numbering plan. This command is only applicable if you
have a PRI network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
prinumberingplan <get|isdn|unknown>



isdn With this parameter, the numbering plan is identified to
the upstream switch as ISDN, and the number type,
which is either national or international, is determined
from the dialed phone number. If the dialed phone
number starts with the international dialing prefix that is
currently selected, the type is set to the international
and the prefix is removed from the number before the
number is sent to the upstream switch. Otherwise, the
number is marked as national and passed to the
upstream switch without modification.

unknown This is the default selection. With this parameter, the
numbering plan and number type are sent to the
upstream as unknown, and the dialed phone number is
sent without notification. The unknown parameter is
preferred and should work with all properly configured
PBXs and with most telephone company switches. A
notable exception in North America is an ATT 5ESS
switch, which is provisioned with Accunet, or an ATT
4ESS switch. For these switches, set the numbering
type to ISDN.

Feedback Examples
• prinumberingplan isdn
returns
prinumberingplan isdn

• prinumberingplan unknown
returns
prinumberingplan unknown

• prinumberingplan get
returns
prinumberingplan unknown

Comments
(page 3): Numbering Plan
your system.

4 - 217


prioutsideline
Sets or gets the PRI number that is dialed for outside line access.

Syntax
prioutsideline get
prioutsideline set ["outside_line"]



set Sets the outside-line-access PRI number when
followed by the parameter “outside_line”. To erase
the current setting, omit the parameter.

“outside_line” Numeric string. This number is provided by your
network service provider.

Feedback Examples
• prioutsideline set 9
returns
prioutsideline 9

• prioutsideline get
returns
prioutsideline 9

Comments
This number is needed if your system is on a PBX.
Outside Line Dialing Prefix
a system.

4 - 218

System Commands

priswitch
Sets or gets the PRI switch.

Syntax
priswitch get
priswitch set <att5ess|att4ess|norteldms|ni2>
priswitch set <net5/ctr4|nttins-1500|ts-038>


get Returns the current switch protocol.

set Sets the PRI switch. One of the switch protocol
parameters is required.

att5ess|att4ess| Switch protocol values.
norteldms|ni2| For E1, net5/ctr4 is the default. net5/ctr4 is the
net5/ctr4| standard ETSI protocol derived from ITU Q.931.
nttins-1500|ts-038
For T1, net5/ctr4 is also provided for certain Asian
countries, such as Japan, Hong Kong, and Taiwan.

Feedback Examples
• priswitch set att5ess
returns
priswitch att5ess

• priswitch get
returns
priswitch att5ess

Comments
If more than one switch protocol is supported, you must find out from your
telephone service provider which protocol to select. NET5/CTR4 is the
default. It is the standard ETSI protocol derived from ITU Q.931. If you change
the country settings, a new set of PRI switch protocols is loaded.
(page 2): Switch Protocol
your system.

4 - 219


reboot
Restarts the system.

Syntax
reboot now
reboot [yes|no]


now Reboots the system without prompting you.

yes Reboots the system. Can be abbreviated to y.

no Does not reboot the system. Can be abbreviated to n.

Feedback Examples
• reboot
returns
reboot, are you sure? <y,n>

• reboot y
reboots the system with no other feedback returned

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Reset System: Reset
System

4 - 220

System Commands

recentcalls
Returns the list of recent calls.

Syntax
recentcalls

Feedback Examples
• recentcalls
returns
"Polycom VSX Demo" 16/Jun/2007 14:39:56 Out
192.168.1.101 16/Jun/2007 14:40:07 Out
192.168.1.102 16/Jun/2007 14:40:35 Out
192.168.1.103 16/Jun/2007 20:27:33 Out
"John Polycom VSX 7000" 17/Jun/2007 02:13:23 In
192.168.1.104 17/Jun/2007 02:20:08 In
192.168.1.105 17/Jun/2007 02:21:40 In
192.168.1.106 17/Jun/2007 05:53:04 In
"Mary Polycom VSX 7000" 17/Jun/2007 07:00:19 In

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Network > Recent
Calls

4 - 221


registerall
Alias for the all register command.

Syntax
registerall

Feedback Examples
• registerall
returns
camera registered
mute registered
pip registered
popup registered
preset registered
screen registered
vcbutton registered
volume registered
sleep registered
phone registered
video registered
vcstream registered
vc pod registered
vc lan registered

See Also
This command is an alias for the preferred all register command on
page 4-13.
To unregister user feedback, use the all unregister command on page 4-14
or the unregisterall command on page 4-281.

4 - 222

System Commands

registerthissystem
Sets or gets the system’s IP address to be registered and displayed in the global
directory when the system is powered on.

Syntax
registerthissystem [{1..5}|all] <get|yes|no>



all References all GDS servers.


yes Enables this option (register this system).

no Disables this option.

Feedback Examples
• registerthissystem yes
returns
registerthissystem yes

• registerthissystem no
returns

• registerthissystem get
returns

• registerthissystem all get
returns
registerthissystem 1 no

Comments
If you do not enable this option, the system has access to the GDS, but the IP
address does not appear in the global directory.

4 - 223


remotecontrol
Set or gets the setting for intercepting signals from the system remote control.

Syntax
remotecontrol disable <get|all|none>
remotecontrol disable “valid button” [“valid button”...]
remotecontrol dontintercept <all|none>
remotecontrol dontintercept “valid button” [“valid button”...]
remotecontrol enable <all|none>
remotecontrol enable “valid button” [“valid button”...]
remotecontrol intercept <get|all|none>
remotecontrol intercept “valid button” [“valid button”...]


disable Disables specified remote control button(s) so that the
system does not respond.


all All of the remote control buttons.

none None of the remote control buttons.

“valid button” Name of a specific button such as call, hangup, left,
right, up, down, select, home, directory, back, zoom-,
zoom+, volume-, volume+, mute, far, near, auto,
camera, preset, pip, keyboard, delete, ., 0-9, *, #,
graphics, help.

dontintercept Stops intercepting specified remote control button(s).

enable Enables specified remote control button(s).

intercept Disables and intercepts specified remote control
button(s). Notification of button press events is sent to
the API client.

Feedback Examples
• remotecontrol disable all
returns
remotecontrol disable all success

• remotecontrol intercept pip
returns
remotecontrol intercept pip success

• remotecontrol disable get
returns
disabled 1 buttons:pip

4 - 224

System Commands

• remotecontrol intercept get
returns
intercepting 0 buttons

• remotecontrol intercept all
returns
remotecontrol intercept all success

The following is an example of a notification that may be returned after
sending the intercept command.
• notification:buttonintercept::ir:
notification:buttonintercept::ir:
notification:buttonintercept:home:ir:

4 - 225


remotemonenable
Gets the state of remote room and call monitoring.

Syntax
remotemonenable get

Feedback Examples
• remotemonenable get
returns
remotemonenable on

• remotemonenable get
returns
remotemonenable off

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > General Setting >
Security (page 2): Allow Video Display on Web

4 - 226

System Commands

repeat
Repeats a specified command from the history list.

Syntax
repeat {1..64}


{1..64} Repeats the specified command in the history list.
Values larger than the number of commands in the
history list are not valid. The history list may contain up
to 64 commands.

Feedback Examples
• repeat 3
returns
registerthissystem get

• repeat 47
returns
remotecontrol disable get
disabled 0 buttons

• repeat 52
returns
repeat: cannot repeat a repeat command
if the specified command in the history list is a repeat command

4 - 227


requireacctnumtodial
Enables or disables the Require Account Number to Dial option. It is used to
log calls to a specific account so that they can be tracked and billed to the
appropriate departments.

Syntax
requireacctnumtodial <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the option.

no Disables the option.

Feedback Examples
• requireacctnumtodial yes
returns
requireacctnumtodial yes

• requireacctnumtodial no
returns

• requireacctnumtodial get
returns

Comments
When this option is selected, you cannot make a call without first entering an
account number. This account number is saved in the Global Management
System server database along with information specific to the call. Typically,
the Global Management System administrator assigns the account number.
Account Validation: Require Account Number to Dial

4 - 228

System Commands

roomphonenumber
Sets or gets the number of the phone that is located in the same room as the
system.

Syntax
roomphonenumber get
roomphonenumber set [“number”]



set Sets the room phone number when followed by the
“number” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
the “number” parameter.

“number” Phone number for a telephone (not the system) in the
room. Use quotation marks around the number if it
contains spaces. For example: “408 555 2323”

Feedback Examples
• roomphonenumber set
returns
roomphonenumber <empty>

• roomphonenumber set “408 555 2323”
returns
roomphonenumber 408.555.2323

• roomphonenumber get
returns
roomphonenumber 408.555.2323

Comments
If the system is managed by the Global Management System software, this
number will be provided to the Global Management System administrator if
the person using the system requests help.
> Location: Room Telephone Number

4 - 229


rs232 baud, rs232port1 baud
The rs232 baud command sets or gets the baud rate for the first RS-232 port.
For systems with two serial ports, use rs232port1 baud to set the rate for the
second serial port.

Syntax
rs232 baud <get|9600|14400|19200|38400|57600|115200>
rs232port1 baud <get|9600|14400|19200|38400|57600|115200>


get Returns the current baud rate setting.

9600|14400|19200| Sets the RS-232 port to this baud rate.
38400|57600|115200

Feedback Examples
• rs232 baud 9600
returns
rs232 baud 9600

• rs232 baud get
returns
rs232 baud 9600

• rs232port1 baud 14400
returns
rs232port1 baud 14400

• rs232port1 baud get
returns
rs232port1 baud 14400

Comments
> Serial Port: Baud Rate

4 - 230

System Commands

rs232 mode, rs232port1 mode
The rs232 mode command sets or gets the operational mode of the first RS-232
port. For systems with two serial ports, use rs232port1 mode to set the mode
for the second serial port.

Syntax
rs232 mode <get|passthru|control|debug|sony_ptz|closed_caption|
vortex_mixer|cps|interactive_touch_board|polycom_annotation|
smartboard|pointmaker>
rs232port1 mode <get|passthru|control|debug|sony_ptz|closed_caption|
vortex_mixer|cps|interactive_touch_board|polycom_annotation|
smartboard|pointmaker>


get Returns the current mode setting.

passthru Sets the RS-232 port to Pass Thru mode.

contol Sets the RS-232 port to Control mode.

debug Sets the RS-232 port to Debug mode.

sony_ptz Sets the RS-232 port to Sony PTZ mode.

closed_caption Sets the RS-232 port to Closed Caption mode.

vortex_mixer Sets the RS-232 port to Vortex Mixer mode.

cps|interactive_touc Reserved for future applications.
h_board|polycom_anno
tation|smartboard|
pointmaker

Feedback Examples
• rs232 mode control
returns
rs232 mode control
• rs232port1 mode closed_caption
returns
rs232port1 mode closed_caption
• rs232port1 mode get
returns
rs232port1 mode closed_caption

Comments
> Serial Port: RS-232 Mode

4 - 231


rs232monitor
Sets or gets the state of RS-232 serial port monitoring. When RS-232
monitoring is enabled, you can view all communication in and out of the serial
port as output to Telnet port 23.

Syntax
rs232monitor get
rs232monitor <on|off>


on Enables RS-232 serial port monitoring.

off Disables RS-232 serial port monitoring.


Feedback Examples
• rs232monitor on
returns
rs232monitor on succeeded

• rs232monitor off
returns
rs232monitor off succeeded

• rs232monitor get
returns
rs232monitor off

4 - 232

System Commands

rs366dialing
Sets or gets RS-366 dialing. This command is only applicable if you have a V.35

Syntax
rs366dialing <get|on|off>



on Enables RS-366 dialing.

off Disables RS-366 dialing.

Feedback Examples
• rs366dialing on
returns
rs366dialing on

• rs366dialing off
returns
rs366dialing off

• rs366dialing get
returns
rs366dialing off

Comments
Enable this option if you want to call from the system through the DCE
connection to the far-site video conferencing system. Disable this option if you
are using your DCE to dial the call or if you have a dedicated connection to the
far site.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530: RS-366 Dialing

4 - 233


rt
Sets or gets the RT serial interface control signal (receive timing: clock). This
command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface connected to
your system.

Syntax
rt <get|normal|inverted>



normal Sets the signal to normal (rising edge receives data).

inverted Sets the signal to inverted (falling edge receives data).

Feedback Examples
• rt normal
returns
rt normal

• rt inverted
returns
rt inverted

• rt get
returns
rt inverted

Comments
The default setting is “normal”.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): RT

4 - 234

System Commands

rts
Sets or gets the RTS serial interface control signal (request to send). This
command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface connected to
your system.

Syntax
rts <get|normal|inverted>





Feedback Examples
• rts normal
returns
rts normal

• rts inverted
returns
rts inverted

• rts get
returns
rts inverted

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): RTS

4 - 235


run
Loads a file from the flash file system and then executes the API commands
contained in it.

Syntax
run “scriptfilename”


“scriptfilename” Name of the script file containing the API commands to
be executed.

Feedback Examples
• run startcall.bat
loads the specified file and executes the API commands within it
if the specified file is found
• run startcall.bat
returns
run: script file startcall.bat not found
if the specified file is not found

Comments
Each API command needs to be placed on a single line with a <CR><LF> as a
terminator.

4 - 236

System Commands

screen
Returns the name of the current user interface screen on the system, registers
or unregisters for screen changes, or goes to a specific user interface screen.

Syntax
screen
screen register get
screen [register|unregister]
screen “screen_name”


screen Returns the name of the current user interface screen if
not followed by other parameters.

register Registers for user interface screen changes. In register
mode, the name of every screen accessed is listed.

get Returns the registration state for screen change events
when followed by the get parameter.

unregister Unregisters from user interface screen changes.

“screen_name” Changes the user interface to display the specified
screen. The supported screens depend on the system
configuration. To determine the name to use for a
specific screen, navigate to that screen in the user
interface and send the screen command.

Feedback Examples
• screen
returns
screen: adminsettings
if the Admin Settings screen is currently displayed in the user interface
• screen register
returns
screen registered

• screen monitors
returns
screen: monitors
and displays the Monitors screen in the user interface

4 - 237


screencontrol
Disables or enables navigation to specified user interface screens of the system.

Syntax
screencontrol enable <all|none|“screen_name”>
screencontrol disable <all|none|“screen_name”>


enable Enables navigation to the specified user interface
screen(s).

all All of the user interface screens.

none None of the user interface screens.

“screen_name” Name of a specific user interface screen.

disable Disables navigation to the specified user interface
screen(s).

Feedback Examples

• screencontrol enable all
returns
screencontrol enable all success

• screencontrol disable adminsettings
returns
screencontrol disable adminsettings success
and disables navigation to the Admin Settings screen of the user interface

• screencontrol disable none
returns
screencontrol disable none success
and reverses all screen disable commands

• screencontrol disable main
returns
error: screen “main” unknown
screencontrol disable main failed
if “main” is an unknown screen name

See Also
Refer to the screen command on page 4-237 for details about accessing screen
names.

4 - 238

System Commands

secondarycallchoice
Sets or gets the secondary call type for placing calls.

Syntax
secondarycallchoice <get|isdn|ip|sip>


get Returns the current secondary call type.

isdn Sets the secondary call type to ISDN.

ip Sets the secondary call type to IP.

sip Sets the secondary call type to SIP.

Feedback Examples
• secondarycallchoice ip
returns
secondarycalltype ip

• secondarycallchoice get
returns
secondarycalltype ip

See Also
You can set the primary call type using the primarycallchoice command on
page 4-214.

4 - 239


serialnum
Returns the serial number of the system.

Syntax
serialnum

Feedback Examples

• serialnum
returns
serialnum 82065205E72EB1

Comments
User interface screen location: System > System Information: Serial Number

4 - 240

System Commands

setaccountnumber
Sets the account number when it is required for dialing out.

Syntax
setaccountnumber “account number”


“account number” Number that is needed to validate the account before
dialing out.

Feedback Examples

• setaccountnumber 1234
returns
setaccountnumber 1234

Comments
The account number is saved in the Global Management System database and
is generally assigned by the Global Management System administrator. The
requireacctnumtodial command on page 4-228 and the validateacctnum
command on page 4-293 must be enabled for this command to work. When
you make a call, you will be prompted to enter your account number.

See Also
See the related requireacctnumtodial command on page 4-228 and
validateacctnum command on page 4-293.

4 - 241


showgatekeeper
Returns the gatekeeper addresses specified.

Syntax
showgatekeeper <active|primary|alternates|all>


active Displays the IP address for the primary or alternate
gatekeeper that is currently active.

primary Displays the IP address for the primary gatekeeper.

alternates Displays the IP address for the alternate gatekeeper(s).

all Displays the IP address for all gatekeepers.

Feedback Examples

• showgatekeeper active
returns
showgatekeeper current ipaddress 192.168.1.200

• showgatekeeper primary
returns
gatekeeper primary ipaddress 192.168.1.201

• showgatekeeper alternates
returns
showgatekeeper alternates begin
showgatekeeper alternates ipaddress 192.168.1.203
showgatekeeper alternates ipaddress1 192.168.1.204
showgatekeeper alternates end

• showgatekeeper all
returns
showgatekeeper all begin
showgatekeeper current ipaddress 192.168.1.201
showgatekeeper primary ipaddress 192.168.1.202
showgatekeeper alternates ipaddress 192.168.1.203
showgatekeeper all end

Comments
H.323 Settings

4 - 242

System Commands

showpopup
Displays a message box in the user interface.

Syntax
showpopup “text to display”


“text to display” Message to display to users. Enclose the text in
quotation marks if it contains a space.

Feedback Examples

• showpopup “The conference will resume in three minutes.”
returns
showpopup “The conference will resume in three minutes.”
and displays the message box in the user interface

Comments
Sending this command displays the message as a popup dialog in the user
interface, along with an alert tone.

4 - 243


sleep
Puts the system in sleep mode within 15 seconds and returns sleep.

Syntax
sleep
sleep <register|unregister>
sleep register get


sleep Puts the system in sleep mode if not followed by other
parameters.

register Registers for sleep or wake events.

unregister Unregisters from sleep or wake events.

get Returns whether the system is registered for sleep
event notification.

Feedback Examples

• sleep
returns
sleep
and puts the system in sleep mode within 15 seconds

• sleep register
returns
sleep registered

sleep register
returns
info: event/notification already active:sleep

• sleep unregister
returns
sleep unregistered

sleep unregister
returns
info: event/notification not active:sleep

See Also
To wake the system from sleep mode, use the wake command on page 4-306.

4 - 244

System Commands

sleeptext
Sets or gets the text to be displayed with the logo for 15 seconds as the system
goes into sleep mode.

Syntax
sleeptext get
sleeptext set [“text”]


get Returns the current text.

set Sets the text to be displayed on the screen saver when
followed by the “text” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit “text”.

“text” Screen saver text to be displayed when the system is in
sleep mode. Enclose the text in quotation marks if it
includes spaces.

Feedback Examples
• sleeptext set
returns
sleeptext <empty>

• sleeptext set "Pick up the remote control to use the system"
returns
sleeptext "Pick up the remote control to use the system"

Comments
Web interface screen location: System Setup > Utilities > Screen Saver: Logo
Screen Text

4 - 245


sleeptime
Sets or gets the wait time value before the system goes to sleep and displays
the screen saver.

Syntax
sleeptime <get|0|1|3|15|30|60|120|240|480>



0|1|3|15|30|60|120| Sets the number of minutes from last user interaction to
240|480 entering sleep mode. The default value is 3.

Feedback Examples

• sleeptime 30
returns
sleeptime 30

Comments
> System Settings > Appearance: Screen Saver Wait Time

4 - 246

System Commands

snapshottimeout
Sets or gets the Snapshot Timeout setting.

Syntax
snapshottimeout <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the option: the display times out after four
minutes and the system returns to live video.

no Disables the option: the snapshot stays on screen
indefinitely.

Feedback Examples
• snapshottimeout yes
returns
snapshottimeout yes

• snapshottimeout no
returns
snapshottimeout no

• snapshottimeout get
returns
snapshottimeout no

Comments
By default, all slides and snapshots are displayed for a period of four minutes.
When the display times out after four minutes, the VSX system automatically
returns to live video. However, when this option is disabled, the snapshot or
slide stays on screen indefinitely until the user presses the Snap button on the
remote control to return to live video.
Monitors: Snapshot Timeout

4 - 247


snmpadmin
Sets or gets the SNMP administrator name.

Syntax
snmpadmin get
snmpadmin set ["admin name"]



set Sets the administrator name when followed by the
“admin name” parameter. To erase the current setting,
omit “admin name”.

“admin name” SNMP administrator contact name. Character string.
Enclose the character string in quotation marks if it
includes spaces. Example: “John Admin”

Feedback Examples

• snmpadmin set
returns
snmpadmin <empty>

• snmpadmin set “John Admin”
returns
snmpadmin “John Admin”

• snmpadmin get
returns
snmpadmin “John Admin”

Comments
SNMP: Contact Name

4 - 248

System Commands

snmpcommunity
Sets or gets the SNMP community name.

Syntax
snmpcommunity get
snmpcommunity set ["community name"]



set Sets the SNMP community name when followed by the
“community name” parameter. To erase the current

“community name” SNMP community name. Character string. Enclose the
character string in quotation marks if it includes spaces.

Feedback Examples

• snmpcommunity set
returns
snmpcommunity <empty>

• snmpcommunity set Public
returns
snmpcommunity Public

• snmpcommunity get
returns
snmpcommunity Public

Comments
SNMP: Community

4 - 249


snmpconsoleip
Sets or gets the SNMP console IP address.

Syntax
snmpconsoleip get
snmpconsoleip set ["xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"]



set Sets the SNMP console IP address when followed by
the “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit the parameter.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address of the console.

Feedback Examples

• snmpconsoleip set
returns
snmpconsoleip <empty>

• snmpconsoleip set 192.168.1.111
returns
snmpconsoleip 192.168.1.111

• snmpconsoleip get 192.168.1.111
returns
snmpconsoleip 192.168.1.111

Comments
SNMP: Console IP Address

4 - 250

System Commands

snmplocation
Sets or gets the SNMP location name.

Syntax
snmplocation get
snmplocation set ["location name"]



set Sets the SNMP location name when followed by the
“location name” parameter. To erase the current

“location name” SNMP location name. Enclose the location name in
quotation marks if it includes spaces.

Feedback Examples

• snmplocation set
returns
snmplocation <empty>

• snmplocation set “Mary_Polycom in United States”
returns
snmplocation “Mary_Polycom in United States”

• snmplocation get
returns
snmplocation “Mary_Polycom in United States”

Comments
SNMP: Location Name

4 - 251


snmpsystemdescription
Sets or gets the SNMP system description.

Syntax
snmpsystemdescription get
snmpsystemdescription set ["system description"]



set Sets the SNMP system description when followed by
the “system description” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit the parameter.

“system description” SNMP system description.

Feedback Examples

• snmpsystemdescription set
returns
snmpsystemdescription <empty>

• snmpsystemdescription set “videoconferencing system”
returns
snmpsystemdescription “videoconferencing system”

• snmpsystemdescription get
returns
snmpsystemdescription “videoconferencing system”

Comments
SNMP: System Description

4 - 252

System Commands

snmptrapversion
Sets or gets the SNMP trap version.

Syntax
snmptrapversion get
snmptrapversion set <v1|v2c>



set Sets the SNMP trap protocol that the system uses.

v1|v2c SNMP trap version 1 or version 2c.

Feedback Examples

• snmptrapversion set v1
returns
snmptrapversion v1

• snmptrapversion set v2c
returns
snmptrapversion v2c

• snmptrapversion get
returns
snmptrapversion v2c

Comments
SNMP

4 - 253


soundeffectsvolume
Sets, gets, or tests the volume level of the ring tone and user alert tone on the
system.

Syntax
soundeffectsvolume get
soundeffectsvolume set {0..10}
soundeffectsvolume test


get Returns the current setting along with a test tone from
the system at that volume level.

set Sets the volume of sound effects. Requires a volume
parameter in the range {0..10}.

test Tests the volume of sound effects.

Feedback Examples

• soundeffectsvolume set 6
returns
soundeffectsvolume 6

• soundeffectsvolume get
returns
soundeffectsvolume 6

• soundeffectsvolume test
returns
soundeffectsvolume test
and a tone is produced by the system

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Admin Settings > Audio: Sound
Effects Volume

4 - 254

System Commands

spidnum
Sets or gets the ISDN SPID numbers assigned to the BRI lines used by the
system. This command is only applicable if you have a BRI network interface

Syntax
spidnum get <all|1b1|1b2|2b1|2b2|3b1|3b2|4b1|4b2>
spidnum set <1b1|1b2|2b1|2b2|3b1|3b2|4b1|4b2> [“spid number”]


get Returns the current SPID number associated with a B
channel of a particular line.

all Returns SPIDs for all channels of all lines.

1b1|1b2|2b1|2b2|3b1| The line and B channel. Valid values are:
3b2|4b1|4b2 1b1 BRI line 1, B channel 1

set Sets the SPID number for a B channel line when
followed by the “number” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit “number”.

“spid number” Numeric string. SPID numbers are generally provided
by your network service provider.

Feedback Examples

• spidnum get all
returns
spidnum 1b1 7005551212
spidnum 1b2 7005552323
spidnum 2b1 7005553434
spidnum 2b2 7005554545
spidnum 3b1 7005555656
spidnum 3b2 7005556767
spidnum 4b1 7005557878
spidnum 4b2 7005558989
if 4 lines with channels 1b1 through 4b2 are attached in the above format

4 - 255


• spidnum set 1b1
returns
spidnum 1b1 <empty>

• spidnum set 1b1 7005551212
returns
spidnum 1b1 7005551212

Comments
SPIDs generally apply only in the United States and Canada. If you are behind
an internal phone system (PBX), SPIDs may not be required.
(page 4): ISDN BRI SPIDs

4 - 256

System Commands

st
Sets or gets the st serial interface control signal (send timing: clock) setting.
This command is only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface

Syntax
st <get|normal|inverted>



normal Sets the signal to normal (falling edge sends data).

inverted Sets the signal to inverted (rising edge sends data).

Feedback Examples

• st normal
returns
st normal

• st inverted
returns
st inverted

• st get
returns
st inverted

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 3): ST

4 - 257


stream
Starts or stops streaming from your system.

Syntax
stream start [“addr”] [“ttl”] [“vidPort”] [“audPort”] [“vidCmpr”]
[“audCmpr”] [“bitrate”]
stream stop


start Starts streaming. A meeting password may be
required.

“addr” Specifies address for the stream.

“ttl” Specifies TTL for the stream.

“vidPort” Specifies video port for the stream.

“audPort” Specifies audio port for the stream.

“vidCmpr” Specifies video compression for the stream.

“audCmpr” Specifies audio compression for the stream.

“bitrate” Specifies bit rate for the stream.

stop Stops streaming.

Feedback Examples
• stream start
returns
stream start

• stream stop
returns
stream stop

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Utilities > Streaming: Start
Streaming
This option is only visible in the user interface if streaming is enabled.

4 - 258

System Commands

streamannounce
Sets or gets the streaming announcement setting.

Syntax
streamannounce <get|yes|no>



yes Enables streaming announcement.

no Disables streaming announcement.

Feedback Examples
• streamannounce yes
returns
streamannounce yes

• streamannounce no
returns
streamannounce no

• streamannounce get
returns
streamannounce no

Comments
When this option is enabled, the names of users logged on to your system are
displayed on screen.
Streaming: Enable Streaming Announcement

4 - 259


streamaudioport
Sets or gets the stream audio port setting.

Syntax
streamaudioport get
streamaudioport set ["stream audio port"]



set Sets the stream audio port when followed by the
“stream audio port” parameter. To erase the current
setting, omit the “stream audio port” parameter.

“stream audio port” Audio port number.

Feedback Examples
• streamaudioport set 16384
returns
streamaudioport 16384

• streamaudioport get
returns

Comments
By default, the audio port is a fixed port. This may be changed if a user needs
to go through the firewall.
Streaming: Audio Port

4 - 260

System Commands

streamenable
Sets or gets whether streaming is allowed on the system.

Syntax
streamenable <get|yes|no>



yes Enables streaming.

no Disables streaming.

Feedback Examples
• streamenable yes
returns
streamenable yes

• streamenable no
returns
streamenable no

• streamenable get
returns
streamenable no

Comments
Streaming: Allow Streaming

4 - 261


streammulticastip
Sets or gets the multicast IP address for streaming.

Syntax
streammulticastip get
streammulticastip set ["xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"]



set Sets the multicast IP address when followed by the

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” Multicast IP address.

Feedback Examples
• streammulticastip set
returns
streammulticastip <empty>

• streammulticastip set 192.168.1.101
returns
streammulticastip 192.168.1.101

• streammulticastip get
returns

Comments
A default address is entered for you based on your system’s serial number.
This ensures that you do not have the same multicast address as another
Polycom system. You can change this default address using this command.
Streaming: IP Multicast Address

4 - 262

System Commands

streamrestoredefaults
Restores the stream Speed, IP Multicast Address, Number of Router Hops,
Audio Port, and Video Port defaults and prints out the values.

Syntax
streamrestoredefaults

Feedback Examples
• streamrestoredefaults
returns
streamspeed 192
streamrouterhops 1
streamvideoport 16386
streamenable no
streamannounce yes

4 - 263


streamrouterhops
Sets or gets the number of routers you want the streaming video to pass
through. This allows you to control who can see your streaming video.

Syntax
streamrouterhops get
streamrouterhops set {1..127}



set Sets the number of routers when followed by a number.
To erase the current setting, omit the number.

{1..127} Numeric value. Number of routers the streaming video
has to pass through.

Feedback Examples
• streamrouterhops set 1
returns
streamrouterhops 1

• streamrouterhops get
returns
streamrouterhops 1

Comments
Streaming: Number of Router Hops (TTL)

4 - 264

System Commands

streamspeed
Sets or gets the speed of the video stream.

Syntax
streamspeed <get|192|256|384|512>



192|256|384|512 Sets the streaming speed at the designated number of
kbps.

Feedback Examples
• streamspeed 192
returns
streamspeed 192

• streamspeed get
returns
streamspeed 192

Comments
Streaming: Speed

4 - 265


streamvideoport
Sets or gets the stream video port.

Syntax
streamvideoport get
streamvideoport set ["video port"]



set Sets the stream video port when followed by the
“video port” parameter. To erase the current setting,
omit the parameter.

“video port” Video port number.

Feedback Examples
• streamvideoport set 16386
returns

• streamvideoport get
returns

Comments
By default, the video port is a fixed port. This command lets you change
stream video port to go through a firewall.
Streaming: Video Port

4 - 266

System Commands

subnetmask
Sets or gets the subnet mask of the system.

Syntax
subnetmask get
subnetmask set [“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”]


get Returns the current subnet mask.

set Sets the subnet mask of the system when followed by
the ”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” Subnet mask of the system.

Feedback Examples

• subnetmask set 255.255.255.0
returns

• subnetmask get
returns

Comments
(page 2): Subnet Mask

4 - 267


subwoofer
Sets or gets whether to use the system’s subwoofer. This command is only
valid for VSX 7000 and VSX 7000s systems.

Syntax
subwoofer <get|on|off>



on Turns the system subwoofer on.

off Turns the system subwoofer off.

Feedback Examples
• subwoofer on
returns
subwoofer on

• subwoofer off
returns
subwoofer off

• subwoofer get
returns
subwoofer off

Comments
Subwoofer Speaker

4 - 268

System Commands

subwooferoffset
Sets or gets the volume level for the subwoofer without changing the master
audio volume. This command is only valid for VSX 7000 and VSX 7000s
systems.

Syntax
subwooferoffset <get|+3|+2|+1|0|-1|-2|-3>



+3|+2|+1|0|-1|-2|-3 Sets the subwoofer to this level dB.

Feedback Examples
• subwooferoffset +2
returns
subwooferoffset +2

• subwooferoffset get
returns
subwooferoffset +2

Comments
Subwoofer Level

4 - 269


sysinfo
Sets or gets registration for ISDN, IP, and gatekeeper status notifications.

Syntax
sysinfo <get|register|unregister>


get Returns registration status.

register Registers the shell session to receive ISDN, IP, and
gatekeeper status notifications.

unregister Unregisters the shell session for ISDN, IP, and
gatekeeper status notifications.

Feedback Examples

• sysinfo register
returns
sysinfo registered

• sysinfo unregister
returns
sysinfo unregistered

• sysinfo get
returns
sysinfo unregistered

The following are examples of notifications of status changes in ISDN lines
that may be returned after registering to receive sysinfo notifications.
• linestate: isdnline[1] down


• linestate: isdnline[3] up






4 - 270

System Commands

systemname
Sets or gets the name of the system.

Syntax
systemname get
systemname set “system name”



set Sets the system name to “system name”.

“system name” Character string specifying the system name. Enclose
Example: “Polycom VSX Demo”

Feedback Examples

• systemname set “Polycom VSX Demo”
returns
systemname “Polycom VSX Demo”

• systemname set get
returns
systemname “Polycom VSX Demo”

Comments
The first character must be a numeric (a digit) or alphabetic (a letter) character
including foreign language characters. The name can be any combination of
alphanumeric characters and may be up to 30 characters in length. The system
name cannot be blank.
> System Settings > Directory: System Name

4 - 271


tcpports
Sets or gets the TCP ports on the system.

Syntax
tcpports get
tcpports set [{1024..49150}]


set Sets the TCP ports when followed by a value from the
range {1024..49150}. To erase the current setting,
omit the value.

get Returns the current TCP port setting.

Feedback Examples

• tcpports set 3233
returns
tcpports 3233

• tcpports get
returns
tcpports 3233

Comments
The Fixed Ports option on the same page must be selected for the TCP Ports
Firewall: Fixed Ports > TCP Ports

4 - 272

System Commands

techsupport
Sends your phone number to Global Management System technical support if
your system is managed by the Global Management System.

Syntax
techsupport <"phone num">


“phone num” Phone number at which the user of this system will be
contacted. To obtain rapid assistance, include the area
code with the phone number. Enclose the string in
quotation marks if it includes spaces. Example: “408
555 2323”

Feedback Examples

• techsupport “408 555 2323”
returns
techsupport will contact you at 408 555 2323

Comments
The Support icon is visible only when the system is registered with the
Polycom Global Management System.
User interface screen location: On the remote control press the Help
button and select Support

4 - 273


teleareacode
Sets or gets the system’s area code.

Syntax
teleareacode get
teleareacode set ["telephone_area_code"]



set Sets the system’s area code when followed by the
“telephone_area_code” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit the “telephone_area_code”
parameter.

“telephone_area_code” System’s area code.

Feedback Examples

• teleareacode set
returns
teleareacode <empty>

• teleareacode set 408
returns
teleareacode 408

• teleareacode get
returns
teleareacode 408

Comments
Telephony

4 - 274

System Commands

telenumber
Sets or gets the system’s telephone number.

Syntax
telenumber get
telenumber set ["telephone_number"]



set Sets the telephone number when followed by the
“telephone number” parameter. To erase the current

“telephone_number” System’s telephone number. Enclose the string in
quotation marks if it includes spaces. Example: “408
555 2323”

Feedback Examples

• telenumber set
returns
telenumber <empty>

• telenumber set “408 555 2323”
returns
telenumber “408 555 2323”

• telenumber get
returns
telenumber “408 555 2323”

Comments
Telephony: Room Telephone Number

4 - 275


telnetmonitor
Sets or gets the state of Telnet session monitoring. When Telnet monitoring is
enabled, you can view all communication to and from the Telnet port 24
session as output to Telnet port 23.

Syntax
telnetmonitor get
telnetmonitor <on|off>



on Enables Telnet monitoring.

off Disables Telnet monitoring

Feedback Examples

• telnetmonitor on
returns
telnetmonitor on succeeded

• telnetmonitor off
returns
telnetmonitor off succeeded

• telnetmonitor get
returns
telnetmonitor off

4 - 276

System Commands

timediffgmt
Sets or gets the time difference from where the system is installed and
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This allows the Global Management System to
view the local time of the managed system.

Syntax
timediffgmt <get|{-12:00..+12:00}>



{-12:00..+12:00} Sets the time difference from GMT to this value. +00:00
is GMT time.

Feedback Examples

• timediffgmt -06:00
returns
timediffgmt -06:00 success

• timediffgmt get
returns
timediffgmt -06:00 success

Comments
> Location (page 2): Time Zone

4 - 277


traceroute
Runs a trace route to test. If successful, it displays the routing path between the
local system and the IP address entered.

Syntax
traceroute host [hops]


host Specifies host name or an IP address.

hops Value must be 0 < hops < 100.

Feedback Examples
• traceroute 192.168.1.109
returns
testlan traceroute complete.
29 hops.

• traceroute stereo.polycom.com
returns
hostname stereo.polycom.com (192.168.1.110)
testlan traceroute complete.
29 hops.

Comments
User interface screen location: System > Diagnostics > Network > Trace
Route

4 - 278

System Commands

typeofservice
Sets or gets the type of service for Quality of Service.

Syntax
typeofservice <get|ipprecedence|diffserv>



ipprecedence Selects IP precedence service.

diffserv Selects DiffServ service.

Feedback Examples

• typeofservice diffserv
returns
typeofservice diffserv

• typeofservice ipprecedence
returns
typeofservice ipprecedence

• typeofservice get
returns
typeofservice ipprecedence

Comments
Quality of Service

See Also
See the ipprecaudio, ipprecfecc, ipprecvideo command on page 4-150
and the diffservaudio, diffservfecc, diffservvideo command on
page 4-73.

4 - 279


udpports
Sets or gets the UDP ports on the system.

Syntax
udpports get
udpports set [{1024..49150}]


get Returns the current UDP port setting.

set Sets the UDP ports when followed by a value from the
range {1024..49150}. To erase the current setting,
omit the value.

Feedback Examples

• udpports set 3230
returns
udpports 3230

• udpports get
returns
udpports 3230

Comments
The Fixed Ports option on the same page must be selected for the UDP Ports
Firewall: Fixed Ports: UDP Ports

4 - 280

System Commands

unregisterall
Alias for the all unregister command.

Syntax
unregisterall

Feedback Examples
• unregisterall
returns
camera unregistered
mute unregistered
pip unregistered
popup unregistered
preset unregistered
screen unregistered
vcbutton unregistered
volume unregistered
sleep unregistered
phone unregistered
video unregistered
vcstream unregistered
vc pod unregistered
vc lan unregistered

See Also
This command is an alias for the preferred all unregister command on
page 4-14.
To register for user feedback, use the all register command on page 4-13 or
the registerall command on page 4-222.

4 - 281


usefixedports
Sets or gets the Fixed Ports configuration.

Syntax
usefixedports <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the use of Fixed Ports.

no Disables the use of Fixed Ports.

Feedback Examples

• usefixedports yes
returns
usefixedports yes

• usefixedports no
returns
usefixedports no

• usefixedports get
returns
usefixedports no

Comments
Firewall: Fixed Ports

4 - 282

System Commands

usegatekeeper
Sets or gets the gatekeeper mode (off, specify, or auto).

Syntax
usegatekeeper <get|off|specify|auto>


Note: A gatekeeper is not required to make IP-to-IP
LAN calls. In these situations, select the off option.

off Select this option if no gatekeeper is required or if you
make IP-to-IP LAN calls.

specify Specifies a gatekeeper.
If this option is selected, you must enter the gatekeeper
IP address or name using the gatekeeperip

auto Sets the system to automatically find an available
gatekeeper.

Feedback Examples

• usegatekeeper off
returns
usegatekeeper off

• usegatekeeper specify
returns
usegatekeeper specify

• usegatekeeper auto
returns
usegatekeeper auto

• usegatekeeper get
returns
usegatekeeper auto

Comments
H.323 Settings (page 2): Use Gatekeeper

See Also
See the gatekeeperip command on page 4-106.

4 - 283


usepathnavigator
Sets or gets the Polycom PathNavigator™ mode, if PathNavigator is used with
the system.

Syntax
usepathnavigator <get|always|never|required>



always Always use PathNavigator to place a multipoint call.
Never use the external MCU.

never Never use PathNavigator to place a multipoint call. Use
the external MCU instead.

required This is the default. When this option is selected, if the
multipoint call is within the MCU capabilities, it is
handled by the MCU; otherwise, beyond the MCU
capabilities, it is handled through the
PathNavigator/MGC™.

Feedback Examples
• usepathnavigator always
returns
usepathnavigator always
• usepathnavigator never
returns
usepathnavigator never
• usepathnavigator required
returns
• usepathnavigator get
returns

Comments
This option is only accessible if PathNavigator is used.
Because PathNavigator uses an MGC, it can handle video conferences with
more participants and higher speeds than an embedded MCU. PathNavigator,
which supports ad-hoc multipoint video conferencing, is required to
implement Conference on Demand™. Conference on Demand allows users to
bring multiple endpoints together in a video conference on an unscheduled
basis. It allows users to place multipoint video calls to remote participants by
only using their names and/or numbers that correspond to those remote
locations.
H.323 Settings (page 2): Use PathNavigator for Multipoint Calls

4 - 284

System Commands

useroompassword
Sets or gets the Use Room Password for Remote Access setting.

Syntax
useroompassword get
useroompassword <yes|no>



no Configures the system to use a separate room
password and remote access password.

yes Configures the system to use the same password for
room and remote access.

Feedback Examples

• useroompassword yes
returns
useroompassword yes

• useroompassword no
returns
useroompassword no

• useroompassword get
returns
useroompassword no

Comments
> Security: Use Room Password for Remote Access

4 - 285


v35broadcastmode
Sets or gets the V.35 broadcast mode. This command is only applicable if you
have a V.35 network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
v35broadcastmode <get|on|off>



on Turns on V.35 broadcast.

off Turns off V.35 broadcast.

Feedback Examples

• v35broadcast on
returns
v35broadcast on

• v35broadcast off
returns
v35broadcast off

• v35broadcast get
returns
v35broadcast off

4 - 286

System Commands

v35dialingprotocol
Sets or gets the V.35 dialing protocol. This command is only applicable if you
have a V.35 network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
v35dialingprotocol <get|rs366>



rs366 Enables RS-366 as the dialing protocol. At this time,
RS-366 is the only supported dialing protocol on the
system.

Feedback Examples

• v35dialingprotocol rs366
returns
v35dialingprotocol rs366

• v35dialingprotocol get
returns
v35dialingprotocol rs366

Comments
Selecting a dialing protocol is not needed if you are using your DCE to dial the
call or if you have a dedicated connection to the far site.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530: RS-366 Dialing

4 - 287


v35num
Sets or gets the ISDN video numbers assigned to the system. This command is
only applicable if you have a V.35 network interface connected to your system.

Syntax
v35num get <1b1|1b2>
v35num set <1b1|1b2> ["v35 number"]


get Returns the current ISDN video number associated
with a B channel of a particular line. Requires
<1b1|1b2>.

1b1|1b2 B1 and B2 channels:
1b1 designates line 1, B channel 1 (B1).
1b2 designates line 1, B channel 2 (B2).

set Sets the ISDN video number for a B channel line when
followed by a “v35 number” parameter. To erase the
current setting, omit the “v35 number” parameter. 1b1
is port 1 and 1b2 is port 2.

“v35 number” Numeric string. This is the ISDN video number(s)
provided by your network service provider.

Feedback Examples

• v35num set 1b1
returns
v35num 1b1 <empty>

• v35num set 1b2 7005551212
returns
v35num 1b2 7005551212

• v35num get 1b2
returns
v35num 1b2 7005551212

Comments
The 1b1 and 1b2 parameters follow the convention and nomenclature of the
user interface and the isdnnum command on page 4-156.
V.35/RS-449/RS-530

See Also
See the isdnnum command on page 4-156.

4 - 288

System Commands

v35portsused
Sets or gets the number of ports to use on the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 network
interface module.

Syntax
v35portsused <get|1|1+2>



1 Selects one port for one-channel calls.

1+2 Selects two ports for two-channel calls (2 x 56 kbps or
2 x 64 kbps).

Feedback Examples

• v35portsused 1
returns
v35portsused 1

• v35portsused 1+2
returns
v35portsused 1+2

• v35portsused get
returns
v35portsused 1+2

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530: V.35 Ports Used

4 - 289


v35prefix
Sets or gets the V.35 dialing prefix. It assumes that a profile has already been
selected.

Syntax
v35prefix get “valid speed”
v35prefix set “valid speed” [“value”]


get Returns the current setting for “valid speed”.

set Sets the V.35/RS-449/RS-530 prefix when followed by
a “value” parameter. To erase the current setting, omit
the “value” parameter.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are 56, 64, 2x56, 112, 2x64, 128, 168,
192, 224, 256, 280, 320, 336, 384, 392, 7x64, 504,
512, 560, 576, 616, 640, 672, 704, 728, 768, 784, 832,
840, 14x64, 952, 960, 1008, 1024, 1064, 1088, 1120,
1152, 1176, 1216, 1232, 1280, 1288, 21x64, 1400,
1408, 1456, 1472, 1512, 1536, 1568, 1600, 1624,
1664, 1680, 1728, 28x64, 1856, 1920, all.
The parameter “all” lists all the available speeds and
their associated dialing prefixes.

“value” V.35/RS-449/RS-530 prefix, which is a function of your
DCE. Consult the DCE user guide for information.

Feedback Examples

• v35prefix set 56
returns
v35prefix 56 <empty>

• v35prefix set 112 ”#005”
returns
v35prefix 112 ”#005”
and associates the dialing prefix 005 with the speed 112
• v35prefix get 112
returns
v35prefix 112 ”#005”

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 2): Prefix

See Also
See the v35profile command on page 4-291.

4 - 290


v35suffix
Sets or gets the V.35 dialing suffix. It assumes that a profile has already been
selected.

Syntax
v35suffix get “valid speed”
v35suffix set “valid speed” [“value”]


get Returns the current setting for valid speed.

set Sets the dialing suffix when followed by a “value”
parameter. To erase the current setting, omit the
“value” parameter.

“valid speed” Valid speeds are 56, 64, 2x56, 112, 2x64, 128, 168,
192, 224, 256, 280, 320, 336, 384, 392, 7x64, 504,
512, 560, 576, 616, 640, 672, 704, 728, 768, 784, 832,
840, 14x64, 952, 960, 1008, 1024, 1064, 1088, 1120,
1152, 1176, 1216, 1232, 1280, 1288, 21x64, 1400,
1408, 1456, 1472, 1512, 1536, 1568, 1600, 1624,
1664, 1680, 1728, 28x64, 1856, 1920, all.
The parameter “all” lists all the available speeds and
their associated dialing prefixes.

“value” The dialing suffix, which is a function of your DCE.
Consult the DCE user guide for information.

Feedback Examples

• v35suffix set 128
returns
v35suffix 128 <empty>

• v35suffix set 128 ”#4#2”
returns
v35suffix 128 #4#2
and associates the dialing suffix # 4# 2 with the speed 128
• v35suffix get 128
returns
v35suffix 128 #4#2

Comments
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 (page 2): Suffix

See Also
See the v35profile command on page 4-291.

4 - 292

System Commands

validateacctnum
Sets or gets the validation for the Global Management System account number
that is used when dialing out.

Syntax
validateacctnum <get|yes|no>



yes Enables the Global Management System account
number validation option.

no Disables the Global Management System account
number validation option.

Feedback Examples

• validateacctnum yes
returns
validateacctnum yes

• validateacctnum no
returns
validateacctnum no

• validateacctnum get
returns
validateacctnum no

Comments
When the call connects, the system verifies that the account exists with the
Global Management System server. If the account does not exist, the call is
disconnected.
Account Validation: Validate Account Number
This option is only available if Required Account Number to Dial is enabled.

4 - 293


vcbutton
Simulates the Visual Concert VSX play and stop buttons. It can also register or
unregister to receive notification of Visual Concert VSX events.

Syntax
vcbutton <get|play|stop|register|unregister>


get Returns the current setting (play or stop).

play Starts sending the content from the Visual Concert
VSX.

stop Stops sending the content from the Visual Concert
VSX.

register Registers the API session to receive notifications about
Visual Concert VSX events.

unregister Unregisters the API session to receive notifications
about Visual Concert VSX events.

Feedback Examples

• vcbutton register
returns
vcbutton registered

• vcbutton get
returns
vcbutton registered

• vcbutton play
returns
Control event: vcbutton play
vcbutton play

• Pressing the play button at the far site
returns
Control event: vcbutton farplay

• Pressing the stop button on the local system
returns
Control event: vcbutton stop

4 - 294

System Commands

vcraudioout
Enables, disables, or gets the VCR Audio Out Always On setting.

Syntax
vcraudioout <get|yes|no>



yes Enables VCR Audio Out Always On.

no Disables VCR Audio Out Always On.

Feedback Examples

• vcraudioout yes
returns
vcraudioout yes

• vcraudioout no
returns
vcraudioout no

• vcraudioout get
returns
vcraudioout no

4 - 295


vcrrecordsource
Sets or gets the VCR/DVD record source.

Syntax
vcrrecordsource get
vcrrecordsource <near|far|auto|content|content-or-near|
content-or-far|content-or-auto|none>



near Sets the VCR to record the near-site video source.

far Sets the VCR to record the far-site video source.

auto Sets the VCR to automatically record the current
speaker in a point-to-point call.

content Sets the VCR to record content, when presented.

content-or-near Sets the VCR to record near-site video or content,
when presented.

content-or-far Sets the VCR to record far-site video or content, when
presented.

content-or-auto Sets the VCR to record the current speaker or content,
when presented.

none Sets the VCR to record nothing.

Feedback Examples

• vcrrecordsource near
returns
vcrrecordsource near

• vcrrecordsource content-or-auto
returns
vcrrecordsource content-or-auto

• vcrrecordsource get
returns
vcrrecordsource content-or-auto

Comments
If Monitor 2 is enabled, VCR Record Source is automatically set to the
Monitor 1 image and cannot be configured.
Monitors (page 2): VCR Record Source

4 - 296

System Commands

vcstream
Gets the current state of the Visual Concert VSX stream, or registers or
unregisters for notification of state changes in the stream.

Syntax
vcstream <state|register|unregister>


state Returns the current status of the Visual Concert
content stream.

register Registers the Visual Concert stream so that changes to
the stream will be displayed to the API control device,
and reports the current status of the stream.

unregister Unregisters the Visual Concert stream.

Feedback Examples

• vcstream register
returns
vcstream registered

• vcstream unregister
returns
vcstream unregistered

• vcstream state
returns
vcstream off

4 - 297


version
Returns the current system’s version information.

Syntax
version

Feedback Examples

• version
returns
version “release 8.7 - 26jun2007 11:30”

Comments
User interface screen location: System > System Information: System
Software

4 - 298

System Commands

vgaqualitypreference
Sets or gets the bandwidth split for people and content video.

Syntax
vgaqualitypreference get
vgaqualitypreference <content|people|both>



content Sets the VGA quality preference to content video.

people Sets the VGA quality preference to people video.

both Sets the VGA quality preference to both people and
content video.

Feedback Examples

• vgaqualitypreference people
returns
vgaqualitypreference people

• vgaqualitypreference content
returns
vgaqualitypreference content

• vgaqualitypreference both
returns
vgaqualitypreference both

• vgaqualitypreference get
returns
vgaqualitypreference both

Comments
Graphics VGA

See Also
To set the automatic bandwidth adjustment for people and content, use the
contentauto command on page 4-60.

4 - 299


videocallorder
Sets the video call order of the specified protocol to the specified slot.

Syntax
videocallorder <isdn|h323|sip> <1|2|3>


isdn Species ISDN protocol.

h323 Specifies IP protocol.

sip Specifies SIP protocol.

1|2|3 Sets the order in which the specified protocol is
attempted when a video call is placed.

Feedback Examples

• videocallorder h323 1
returns
videocallorder h323 1

• videocallorder isdn 2
returns
videocallorder isdn 2

Comments
Preference (page 2): Dialing Order

See Also
To set the dialing order for audio-only protocols, use the voicecallorder

4 - 300

System Commands

voicecallorder
Sets the voice call order of the specified protocol to the specified slot.

Syntax
voicecallorder <pots|voice|vtx> <1|2|3>


pots Specifies analog phone line.

voice Specifies voice over ISDN protocol.

vtx Specifies the SoundStation VTX 1000.

1|2|3 Sets the order in which the specified method is
attempted when a voice call is placed. Positions 1-3
are relative and are shown as 3-5 in the user interface
if video protocols are enabled.

Feedback Examples

• voicecallorder pots 1
returns
voicecallorder pots 1

• voicecallorder voice 2
returns
voicecallorder voice 2

• voicecallorder vtx 3
returns
voicecallorder vtx 3

Comments
Preference (page 2): Dialing Order

See Also
To set the dialing order for video protocols, use the videocallorder

4 - 301


volume
Sets or gets the call audio volume (not sound effects) on the system or
registration for volume changes.

Syntax
volume <register|unregister>
volume <get|up|down|set {0..50}>


register Registers to receive notification when the volume
changes.


get Returns the current volume level.

up Increases the audio volume by 1.

down Decreases the audio volume by 1.

set Sets the volume to a specified level. Requires a volume
setting from {0..50}.

Feedback Examples

• volume register
returns
volume registered

volume register
returns
info: event/notification already active:volume

• volume set 23
returns
volume 23

• volume up
returns
volume 24

• volume get
returns
volume 24

Comments
Changes the call audio volume (not sound effects) on the system.
Master Audio Volume

4 - 302

System Commands

vortex
Sends commands to a Polycom Vortex mixer.

Syntax
vortex <0|1> mute <on|off>
vortex <0|1> forward “vortex_macro”


0|1 Specifies the serial port to which the Vortex mixer is
connected.

mute Sets the mute state for the Vortex mixer connected to
the specified serial port.

on Mutes the Vortex mixer.

off Unmutes the Vortex mixer.

forward Forwards the vortex_macro to the Vortex mixer
connected to the specified serial port.

“vortex_macro” Specifies the Vortex mixer macro command to send.
For more information about these commands, refer to
the Vortex documentation.

Feedback Examples
The response from the Vortex is returned in the following format:
vortex <portnum> forward <vortexcmd>:<vortexresponse>
• vortex 0 forward F00PING
returns
vortex 0 forward F00PING:F00PONG
if the Vortex responds and
vortex 0 forward F00PING:failed
if the Vortex does not respond
• vortex 1 mute on
returns
vortex 1 mute on
and mutes the Vortex connected to the second serial port on the back of the
system

Comments
The Vortex commands are applicable when you have a Vortex mixer
connected to a system. An API client can send these commands to control a
Vortex mixer using the command format:
vortex <portnum> forward <vortexcmd>
where <portnum> is 0 if the Vortex is connected to first serial port or 1 if the

4 - 303


Vortex is connected to second serial port, and <vortexcmd> is a Vortex-specific
command. Whatever value is passed in this parameter will be sent to the
Vortex.

4 - 304

System Commands

vtxstate
Returns the current state of the SoundStation VTX 1000 conference phone.

Syntax
vtxstate get



Feedback Examples

• vtxstate get
returns
vtxstate false

• vtxstate get
returns
vtxattached

• vtxstate get
returns
vtxattachedonhook

• vtxstate get
returns
vtxattachedoffhook

• vtxstate get
returns
vtxdetached

• vtxstate get
returns
vtxerror

4 - 305


waitfor
This command is used within script files or control panel programs to wait for
a specific event before executing the next statement. It causes the API session
to wait until a call being placed either connects or fails, or until system is ready
to place a call (such as after a reboot waiting for the ISDN lines to come up).

Syntax
waitfor <callcomplete|systemready>


callcomplete Causes the API session to wait until a call being placed
either connects or fails.

systemready Causes the system to return the message “system is
ready” when the system is ready to make a call.

Feedback Examples

• waitfor callcomplete
returns
waiting for call complete
and returns
call is complete
when the call either connects or fails
• waitfor systemready
returns
waiting for system ready
and returns
system is ready
when the system is ready to make a call

Comments
This command can be used to synchronize a remote controller with the system.
The API session echoes the message “call complete” when the call connects
or is aborted.

See Also
See the run command on page 4-236.

4 - 306

System Commands

wake
Wakes the system from sleep mode.

Syntax
wake

Feedback Examples

• wake
returns
wake
and wakes the system from sleep mode

See Also
To put the system in sleep mode, use the sleep command on page 4-244.

4 - 307


wanipaddress
Sets or gets the WAN IP address.

Syntax
wanipaddress get
wanipaddress set [“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”]


set Sets the WAN IP address when followed by the

get Returns the WAN IP address.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” WAN IP address.

Feedback Examples

• wanipaddress set 192.168.1.101
returns

• wanipaddress get
returns

Comments
The NAT Configuration option on the same page must be set to Auto,
Manual, or UPnP for this option to be available.
Firewall: NAT Public (WAN) Address

4 - 308

System Commands

webport
Sets or gets the port to use when accessing the system using the web interface.

Syntax
webport get
webport set “port”



set Sets the web access port to “port”.

Feedback Examples

• webport set 80
returns
webaccessport 80

• webport get
returns
webaccessport 80

Comments
If you change this from the default (port 80), you will need to include the port
number with the IP address when you use the web interface to access the
system. This makes unauthorized access more difficult. After making a
change, you are prompted to restart the system.
> Security (page 2): Web Access Port

4 - 309


whoami
Displays the same initial banner information as when the RS-232/Telnet
session was started with the system.

Syntax
whoami

Feedback Examples

• whoami
returns
Hi, my name is: Polycom VSX Demo
Here is what I know about myself:
Model: VSX7000
Serial Number: 82065205E72EB1
Software Version: Release 8.7 - 26Jun2007 11:30
Build Information: root on domain.polycom.com
FPGA Revision: 4.3.0
Main Processor: BSP15
Time In Last Call: 0:43:50
Total Time In Calls: 87:17:17
Total Calls: 819
SNTP Time Service: auto insync ntp1.polycom.com
Local Time is: Mon, 9 Jul 2007
Network Interface: NONE
IP Video Number: 192.168.1.101
ISDN Video Number: 7005551212
MP Enabled: True
H.323 Enabled: True
FTP Enabled: True
HTTP Enabled: True
SNMP Enabled: True

4 - 310

System Commands

winsresolution
Sets or gets WINS resolution.

Syntax
winsresolution <get|yes|no>



yes Enables WINS resolution.

no Disables WINS resolution.

Feedback Examples

• winsresolution yes
returns
winsresolution yes

• winsresolution no
returns
winsresolution no

• winsresolution get
returns
winsresolution no

Comments
(page 2): WINS Resolution

4 - 311


winsserver
Sets or gets the WINS server.

Syntax
winsserver get
winsserver set ["xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"]


get Returns the WINS server setting.

set Sets the WINS server IP address to
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx". To erase the current setting, omit
the "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" parameter.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” IP address for the WINS server.

Feedback Examples

• winsserver set 192.168.1.101
returns

• winsserver get
returns

Comments
This option is only available if IP Address is set to Enter IP address manually
on the LAN Properties screen. After making a change, you are prompted to
restart the system.
(page 2): WINS Server

4 - 312

System Commands

xmladvnetstats
Gets advanced network statistics in xml for each call.

Syntax
xmladvnetstats [{0..n}]


{0..n} Returns stats for call 0, 1, 2, and so on, where n is the
maximum number of calls supported by the system.

Feedback Examples

• xmladvnetstats
returns
<ADVANCED><CONFERENCE id="0"/><CONNECTION id="1"><FARSITENAME>
Polycom VSX Demo</FARSITENAME><FARSITENUMBER>192.168.1.101
</FARSITENUMBER><FARSITESYSTEM>Polycom/VSX 7000/Release 8.7 -
26Jun2007 11:30</FARSITESYSTEM><CALLTYPE>H.323</CALLTYPE><TRANSMIT>
<AUDIORATE>48 K</AUDIORATE><VIDEORATE>336 K</VIDEORATE>
<VIDEORATEUSED>199 K</VIDEORATEUSED><VIDEOFRAMERATE>15.0
</VIDEOFRAMERATE><VIDEOPACKETLOSS>0</VIDEOPACKETLOSS><VIDEOJITTER>
7 mS</VIDEOJITTER><AUDIOPACKETLOSS>0</AUDIOPACKETLOSS><AUDIOJITTER>
0 mS</AUDIOJITTER><LSDPROTOCOL>---</LSDPROTOCOL><LSDRATE>---
</LSDRATE><MLPPROTOCOL>---</MLPPROTOCOL><MLPRATE>---</MLPRATE>
</TRANSMIT><RECEIVE><AUDIORATE>48 K</AUDIORATE><VIDEORATE>464 K
</VIDEORATE><VIDEORATEUSED>114 K</VIDEORATEUSED><VIDEOFRAMERATE>
29.8</VIDEOFRAMERATE><VIDEOPACKETLOSS>0</VIDEOPACKETLOSS>
<VIDEOJITTER>5 mS</VIDEOJITTER><AUDIOPACKETLOSS>0</AUDIOPACKETLOSS>
<AUDIOJITTER>3 mS</AUDIOJITTER><LSDPROTOCOL>---</LSDPROTOCOL>
<LSDRATE>---</LSDRATE><MLPPROTOCOL>---</MLPPROTOCOL><MLPRATE>---
</MLPRATE></RECEIVE><VIDEOFECERRORS>0</VIDEOFECERRORS><ENCRYPTION>
Disabled</ENCRYPTION></CONNECTION></ADVANCED>

4 - 313


xmlnetstats
Gets network statistics in xml for each call.

Syntax
xmlnetstats [{0..n}]


{0..n} Returns statistics for call 0, 1, 2, and so on, where n is
the maximum number of calls supported by the system.

Feedback Examples

• xmlnetstats
returns
<CONFERENCE id="0"/><CONNECTION id="1"><FARSITENAME>
Polycom VSX Demo</FARSITENAME><FARSITENUMBER>192.168.1.101
</FARSITENUMBER><FARSITESYSTEM>Polycom/VSX 7000/Release 8.7 -
26Jun2007 11:30</FARSITESYSTEM><CALLTYPE>H.323</CALLTYPE><TRANSMIT>
<CALLSPEED>512 K</CALLSPEED><B2CALLSPEED>---</B2CALLSPEED>
<TOTPACKETLOSS>0</TOTPACKETLOSS><PERCENTPACKETLOSS>0.0%
</PERCENTPACKETLOSS><VIDEOPROTOCOL>H.264</VIDEOPROTOCOL>
<VIDEOANNEX>---</VIDEOANNEX><VIDEOFORMAT>SIF</VIDEOFORMAT>
<AUDIOPROTOCOL>Siren14</AUDIOPROTOCOL></TRANSMIT><RECEIVE>
<CALLSPEED>512 K</CALLSPEED><B2CALLSPEED>---</B2CALLSPEED>
<TOTPACKETLOSS>0</TOTPACKETLOSS><PERCENTPACKETLOSS>0.0 %
</PERCENTPACKETLOSS><VIDEOPROTOCOL>H.264</VIDEOPROTOCOL>
<VIDEOANNEX>---</VIDEOANNEX><VIDEOFORMAT>SIF</VIDEOFORMAT>
<AUDIOPROTOCOL>Siren14</AUDIOPROTOCOL></RECEIVE><ERRORS>---
</ERRORS><B2ERRORS>---</B2ERRORS><SYNC>---</SYNC><B2SYNC>---
</B2SYNC></CONNECTION></NETWORK>

4 - 314

A
Room Design and Layout

Reprinted from the Basics of Audio and Visual Systems Design: Revised Edition,
Chapter 12, “Videoconferencing” written by Scott Sharer, CTS, and Jim Smith, CVE,
CTS, copyright 2003, with permission of InfoComm International®
www.infocomm.org
For clarity of discussion, we have divided this section into the following
sub-sections:

• Room construction, including wall construction, windows and window
treatments, ceilings and HVAC;

• Interior design and finishes;

• Furniture design, including placement and layout;

• Room acoustics and acoustic treatment; and

• Room lighting.
The initial layout and construction of the space affects all the elements that are
discussed in other sections of this book [Basics of Audio and Visual Systems
Design], including acoustic characteristics and performance, general and
ambient light control, and overall comfort.

Room Requirements
We begin with general room requirements. The total floor space required for
VC is much greater than we have become used to for general local presentation
and meeting. In architectural terms it is not uncommon to find a rule-of-thumb
applied that allows for up to 15 square feet of floor space per participant in a
traditional presentation or meeting room. If there is a front-of-room presenter
position at a podium, and if there is some use of in-room technology
(projection devices, whiteboards, etc.), then this figure may increase to as
much as 20 square feet of floor space per participant, but rarely any more than
that.

A-1


It is here that we have our first conflict. In videoconferencing we have to
consider not only the issues related to local viewing and hearing but also the
issues of being seen and heard by people at the far-end of the connection. This
means that we must consider sight lines and angles of participant interaction
that go beyond traditional presentation environments. As a rule we should
allow not less than 30 square feet and generally not more than 45 square feet
of floor space per participant in a videoconference space. Though two to three
times what we are used to allowing, this amount ensures that local
participants will see one another and the display of local and remote electronic
images. It also ensures that participants at the far-end will see and hear
everyone arriving at their location via the connection, and that all will see and
hear at a level of quality that does not detract and, in the best deployment,
even enhances the communications.
Having determined the required size of the space, we can move on to the
actual renovation or construction of the space itself. Again the requirements
here are generally less forgiving than those applied in local-only meeting
spaces. In the most basic sense this is because, by sheer definition, at least some
of the participants in a conference-based meeting are not actually in the room.
As such, we cannot count on the typical human mechanisms (the human ears
and brain and our ability to locate sound in three-dimensional space) to
manage any acoustic anomalies.
If we are, for example, in a room that is adjacent to a double-door entry to the
building, then knowing this we can take the inevitable doorway noise into
account as we filter the sounds we hear both inside the meeting room and
coming from that adjacent entryway. Within our own physical and local
environment we have the ability to isolate local unwanted noise from local
“sound of interest” (voices of other people, etc.), and place the unwanted noise
in an inferior position in our conscious thought pattern. We are able to do this
because we know where the noise is coming from and (usually) what is
causing it. We may be annoyed by the noise, but we generally are able to
ignore it. As soon as we add conferencing to the meeting equation, however,
we add the element of electronic pickup and reproduction of all sounds. For
the people at the far-end, the unwanted noise is much more difficult (if not
impossible) to ignore. They do not have the ability to isolate it in
three-dimensional space (the microphones eliminate the spatial reference) and
they often do not know what is making the noise. The brain of the far-end
participant will devote more and more conscious observation and thought
energy to trying to work out these elements, in an attempt to isolate and finally
“ignore” the unwanted sound. We have already stated that they cannot do
this, however, due to the electronic separation between the locations. Thus
they are left with an impossible task that takes up more and more thought
energy, eroding the perceived quality of the spoken communication over time.
Frustration and exasperation quickly set in, and the communication flow
quickly falls apart.
This, then, is one reason we must pay even greater attention to the acoustic and
visual issues for any presentation space that will be connected via conference
to another. Minor, seemingly insignificant anomalies we often ignore in the
local environment become significant impediments to smooth communication

A-2


with people at the far-end of any connection. In short, we must always ask
ourselves, “What does this look like and sound like to the people at the
farend?”
In order to guarantee that the final conference environment will have a solid
foundation, we begin with the construction of the walls, floors and ceilings for
videoconference spaces.

Walls
Conference room walls should be built from slab to slab. That is, there should
be no gaps from the concrete of one floor to the concrete of the next floor.
Resilient, gypsum board mountings should be used to close any gaps. The
thickness of the gypsum board should be 5/8” or more (one layer of 5/8” and
one layer of 1/2” bonded together would be ideal) on the inside of the room,
with 1/2” thick (or as required by local building codes) appropriate for the
outside of the walls. There should always be a difference in thickness between
the materials used on the inner versus the outer walls. That difference in
thickness subdues mechanical coupling (vibration) between the two layers. A
good overall wall thickness is 6”. It is recommended that “offset stud”
construction be used, typically a 6” header and footer with 3.5” verticals
attached in an alternating pattern one toward the outside of the footer, the next
toward the inside and so on.
Fiberglass dense batting or mineral rock wool, 4” to 6” thick (the equivalent of
R-11 to R-13) should be placed in the wall space. The thickness of the batting
is not critical. The critical aspect is that it must be loosely placed in the wall
space, not compacted to fit. The resultant wall will have excellent acoustic
isolation from the outside world. More significant acoustic isolation can be
achieved by placing an additional barrier layer within the wall space.
Typically this barrier will be made of a dense polymer material, about 1/8”
thick, and the improvement regarding loss of sound transmitted through the
wall will be roughly a factor of 10. These materials are available from a variety
of manufacturers.

Windows
Windows usually present the equivalent of an acoustic nightmare (as well as
altering the way a camera renders colors and brightness). They not only
transmit room sound, but also allow unwanted outside noise to intrude on the
conference space. In the event that windows cannot be avoided, it becomes
essential that window treatment of some sort be used. This treatment should
match the interior look and feel of the space, while providing a high level of
sound and light block. Typically a heavyweight drape (24 ounces or more) of
heavy fullness (not less than 6” fullness on not less than 8” centers per fold) is
preferred. In all cases, the use of sheer draperies or standard vertical or
horizontal blinds should be avoided, due to their inherent inefficiency in
blocking sound and light, and the fine lines they create within the camera field
of view.

A-3


Ceiling Tiles
These should be high-quality acoustic tiles, ideally 1”- thick compressed
densecore fiberglass. An added benefit of this kind of ceiling tile is that it
works well with the indirect lighting as specified elsewhere in this section. To
reduce any extraneous noise from leaving or entering the room via the ceiling
space, the ceiling tiles can be blanketed completely from the plenum side, with
a minimum of 6”- thick unfaced dense fiberglass batting or mineral rock wool,
(the equivalent of R-15 to R-19). Here again, a barrier layer will improve the
performance, but all local building codes must be followed for allowable
materials in the various aspects of room acoustic modifications. To make entry
and exit from the ceiling space easier, the blanket and barrier do not need to
rest on the ceiling tiles, but may be suspended above it.

Air Conditioning
It is critical that all air-handling equipment (blowers, heat exchangers,
solenoid valves, etc.) be located outside the physical meeting room space. This
will prevent the noise burden associated with such equipment from affecting
the participants of any meetings held in the room. Location of air-handling
equipment within the ceiling space of a conference room often renders that
room unusable for video or audio-only conferencing.
The air vents should be of open construction to eliminate “wind noise” while
the system is running. These vents normally are specified as “low-velocity”
diffusers. The number of air vents within the room should be sufficient to
maintain a consistent temperature throughout the space. All HVAC ducts and
diffusers should be oversized for the general application in the space, with
minimum 2’ diameter insulated flexible ducts and matching 2’ noise
dampening diffusers generally best. All ducts should be installed with gradual
bends and curves rather than rigid 90-degree corners. This will minimize
“thunder” sounds as the initial air pushes through the ductwork and into the
room.
There should be a thermostat to control this specific room system
independently of the rest of the building, and that control should be located
within the room.
Important: Allow an additional 5,000 BTU of cooling capacity for a standard
“roll-about” singlemonitor VC system with extended in-room peripherals
(PC, document camera, scan converter, etc.) and a minimum of 10,000 BTU for
a dual display multimedia presentation system with large screen displays. For
the comfort of the participants, the room must accommodate these heat loads,
plus the heat load of a room full of people, with minimal temperature rise.

A-4


Interior Design and Finishes
Wall colors within the field of view of the camera have a significant impact on
the far-end perception of the room video quality. Certain colors are better
suited to video rooms than others. The electronics and software of the
videoconferencing system “builds” the images at the far-end from a gray/blue
reference image. When there is a minimal difference between the room
background and the reference image color, the codec has an easier time
turning the image into numbers, with the result that the far-end will see a
much higher quality video presentation. In general, light gray with just a touch
of blue seems to work best. For rooms that have marginal lighting, slightly
darker colors are quite useful.
In keeping with these color recommendations, the acoustic panels (discussed
elsewhere in this section) should be ordered in light colors such as silver-gray,
quartz or champagne for panels within the camera field of view. For aesthetics,
however, panels may be alternated in color along the wall.

Furniture
As we have noted, VC rooms should be slightly on the large side for the typical
number of attendees. The placement of furniture should present a natural
rapport with the videoconference system, but shouldn’t preclude the local
interaction of conference participants. Doorways used for access to the space
usually should be within the view of one of the camera presets to prevent the
perception from the far-end that people could come into their meeting unseen.
Doorways should not, however, be in constant, direct view of the camera
system, as this may cause unwanted distractions and movement of people in
the picture field.
Any tables within the conference environment should have a light top surface.
Glossy tops should be avoided, as should strong colors or any bold wood
grain. If glossy or saturated color surfaces are unavoidable, then proper
lighting can help reduce (but not necessarily eliminate) their ill effects. The
best table surface color is a flat satin finish, in neutral gray. In cases where the
worst possible surfaces are present, the proper surface color effect can be
achieved by using a table covering, put in place only when the room is being
used for videoconferencing. This will, however, create problems related to the
use of access ports in the tables or movement of end-user items across the
surface.

Acoustics
Additional general elements related to the interior finish details for the space
include acoustics. In terms of ambient noise level, the acoustic design goal for
any conference- enabled room is at least NC-30 (NoiseCriteria-30). This level
of specification dictates a very quiet space (somewhere around 40-dBCSPL

A-5


ambient noise level). A room built to the description found elsewhere in this
section will usually fall between NC-30 and NC-35. The actual NC value is not
critical; what is important is that the room be built with the intent and care
required to achieve the low noise rating. Typically in architectural design, a
site evaluation and analysis are required to certify the noise performance of a
given space. The quieter the room, the easier it is to hear others in the same
room as well as be heard by others who are participating via conference
connection to a far-end location (or locations).
Almost every conference room of medium to large size (larger than 12’x15’)
requires some level of acoustic treatment to provide good speech-rendering to
other conference sites. The quality differences lie in the areas of intelligibility
and consistency of loudness as presented to the far-end. While the people at
the far-end may hear the sounds coming to them, it may be hard for them
clearly to distinguish all of the vowels, consonants, inflections and nuances of
actual human speech communication. (We all know that it is not simply what
you say but how you say it—i.e., the inflections and intonations—that makes
the difference in perceived meaning in human communications.)
Good audio practice dictates that the treated surfaces be composed of at least
two nonparallel walls. And, as the VCS hardware is a potential source of
distracting fan noises, the walls to be treated should include the wall
immediately behind the VCS hardware, whenever this hardware is within the
conference room proper. To help prevent meeting audio from leaking into
adjoining hallways or offices, the walls along those areas also should be
treated.
Approximately 50 percent of the wall area needs be covered with acoustic
panels. The type recommended is 1” thick compressed, dense-core fiberglass,
fabric-covered, or equivalent, with a SABIN (sound absorption index) value of
0.9 average. This specification is sometimes referred to as NRC (noise
reduction coefficient). If reduction of sound passing through is required, then
an additional barrier layer is laminated to the dense-core material, usually
3/8” thick fiber compression board. The barrier layer is placed against the
existing wall material, then the acoustic absorption panels are placed on the
interior-room side of that. The barrier panels will have a SABIN of 0.9, but will
have an additional specification of an STC (sound transmission coefficient) of
20. STC is a measure of the amount of reduction in loudness of sound passing
through the material. Having an STC rating of 20 means there is a factor of 10
reduction in the amount of sound passing through that material. A
high-quality conference room wall usually has an STC of 60 or more—that is,
less than 1/1,000 of the sound in the room leaks through the wall.

Room Lighting
The brightness of the lighting in a videoconference room plays an important
role in determining the far-end view of the meeting. When there are low to
moderate amounts of light—20fc to 35fc (footcandles), typical office
lighting—the distance range of “in focus” objects (depth-of-field) usually is

A-6


only 2’ or 3’ from nearest in-focus to furthest in-focus. With bright light (70fc
or more) the range of in-focus objects can more than double. Participants at the
far-end will see more people in sharp focus, and the codec will have an easier
time encoding the image.
Bright standard direct fluorescent lighting has the undesirable side effect of
being harsh for the local participants. In addition, the direct down lighting
casts significant “drop shadows.” The result is undue stress among
participants.
The best plan for videoconferencing is to use indirect lighting for 80 to 85
percent of the light, and evenly distributed direct lighting for the remaining 15
to 20 percent. The indirect light will help minimize shadows on the faces of the
participants, and make the room more comfortable for viewing the far-end on
the TV monitor. The direct light can be used to create backlight separation
between foreground and background objects or surfaces.
There should be not less than 55fc and ideally as much as 75fc of light (770lux)
on the faces of the participants in the facial field as viewed by the camera in the
conference space. The light should be completely even across the field of
measure or view, and of one consistent color temperature.
To best meet these requirements, indirect fluorescent lighting most often is
recommended. This type of lighting works by using the upper walls and
ceiling as diffuse reflectors for the light. The usual recommended color
temperature for these is 3,000 to 3,800 degrees Kelvin. If there is a significant
quantity of outdoor light entering the room, the lamps should be more than
5,500 degrees Kelvin.

Light Fixtures
The light fixtures generally recommended for indirect lighting are available
from a number of manufacturers. They typically are three-tube, 8” oval
indirect up-lights, though they may take the form of chandelier-style pendant
lights, wall sconces, cove lights or flushmounted specialized troughs. Many
manufacturers work closely with contractors and lighting designers to ensure
that the correct light levels and shadow-free zones are designed into the room,
especially when used for videoconferencing. Lamps for these fixtures are
available in a variety of specified color temperatures from numerous
manufacturers, including Sylvania, General Electric and Osram/Phillips.
Indirect fixtures are available in a number of different designs or “looks,” and
can be purchased in configurations that will complement and not detract from
the interior design of the space.
Lighting layout recommendations and determination of the number of
fixtures needed are handled either by the architectural design firm or by
submitting a complete floor plan, including reflected ceiling, walls and
furniture placement, to fixture vendors. The vendors will analyze the plans
and return a finished lighting layout to the customer, detailing the number of
fixtures, placement and required wiring.

A-7


It is important to remember that the use of traditional meeting room
downcans—even those that have color-corrected light sources—for any
lighting in the field of view that may include human faces is to be avoided at
all costs. These will result in extremely uneven fields of light, or pools, and
heavy, unnatural shadows on the faces of the participants.

Room Preparation Conclusion
When we follow the above guidelines we dramatically improve the odds for
success in the final deployment of live bi-directional conference-based human
communications. An added benefit is that this approach dramatically
enhances the effectiveness of the room as it operates for more traditional
meetings and presentations. The environment is more comfortable and
flexible, and less dependent on specialized electronics for “fixing” deficiencies
in the environment.

Audio Elements
Once the space is prepared, we can focus on integration of the various
audiovisual tools within the environment: audio, video and control.

Audio Input
The primary input device for the audio portion of any conference system is the
microphone. Elsewhere in this book [Basics of Audio and Visual Systems Design]
we have discussed how these devices operate within a given acoustic
environment. We turn now to a short discussion of how these elements
operate within a conference environment, where such factors as
“three-to-one” rules and “critical distance” often are pushed to the limit or
violated entirely.
When sound travels in a room, it follows “the inverse square law.” This means
that the sound level heard at a microphone drops by a factor of four every time
the distance doubles. Another important consideration in room audio design
is the concept of “critical distance,” or the distance at which the loudness of the
room background noise plus reverberation is less than one tenth of the
loudness of voices getting to a particular microphone. (This definition is the
result of research conducted by Don and Carolyn Davis. that is referenced in
the chapter “Designing for Intelligibility” in the Handbook for Sound
Engineers.1)

1 Davis, Don and Carolyn. “Designing for Intelligibility” in Handbook for Sound
Engineers: The New Audio Cyclopedia, ed. Glen Ballou (Indianapolis:
Howard Sams & Co., 1991), 1279-1297.

A-8


As an example, we will work with a room having an ambient noise level of
approximately 60dBA-SPL. A person speaking in a normal voice is 72dBA-SPL
at about 2’ distance. At 4’ the loudness drops to approximately 66dBA-SPL.
This already is farther than the critical distance criteria allow, given the
ambient noise level. At 8’ distance, a normal speaking voice is approximately
60dBA-SPL. Now the voice energy and the room background noise are about
equal. For “send” audio systems in a room to work correctly, therefore, the
room noise level would have to be below 40-45dBA-SPL at the microphones at
all times. This gives us some measure by which we can begin to plan the
microphone array within a space, including selection based on pickup pattern,
sensitivity, noise rejection and signal-to-noise in relation to the ambient noise
floor or level within the space. The good news is that a room designed and
built as described in this section will provide an acoustic space where almost
any properly configured and installed audio system can operate with very
good results.
Perhaps the most difficult issue for any room designer or system planner is
actual microphone placement within the space. Given the fact that many
people view conference table space as sacred (to be used for papers, laptops,
coffee cups and other end-user items), there often is a great deal of pressure to
place the local microphones on the ceiling instead of on the table surface. But
this approach must be taken with great caution. We have already seen the
dramatic impact of changes in the distance between people (their mouths) and
the microphone. Ceiling systems generally place microphones farther away
from the participants’ mouths, not closer; critical distance calculations may
eliminate ceiling placement from consideration for this reason alone. In
addition, the ceiling surface generally is one of the noisiest areas of the room.
Proximity to HVAC ducts and vents, attachment of tiles and runners to
building members that are prone to vibration and shaking, and proximity to
noise from other spaces migrating through the plenum make this area one of
the least desirable for placement of microphones. This doesn’t, however, keep
people from looking at this broad open surface as the best place for
microphones, to “get them off the table.”
If ceiling placement is chosen, the system planner must select the components
with great care from a manufacturer that specializes in this type of audio voice
reinforcement. The manufacturer must be skilled in live audio and capable of
installing the components (that is, being both able and willing to locate
microphones at precisely measured distances from speakers, and locating
those speakers at precisely measured intervals from each other and from the
walls) to extremely tight tolerances. The system provider must fully inform the
endusers of the potential downside effects of this approach. In any event,
simply mounting a standard tabletop microphone on the ceiling tiles or
implementing this solution in an ambient noise environment of 45dBA-SPL or
greater will all but guarantee costly failure. No amount of post-microphone
processing will fix the problems.

A-9


Audio Output
For conference communication we do not really care about producing the
thundering roar of jet aircraft engines, or other sounds reproduced on TV or in
the movies. We are interested in reproducing the human voice. The tone,
intonation, pitch and level of people speaking from the far-end should sound
as much as possible like the sound they would make if they were speaking in
the room. Given what has been covered in other sections of this book [Basics of
Audio and Visual Systems Design], we will touch base here on a couple of simple,
basic elements of the speaker technology we deploy in the conference room.
These basics fall into three subcategories: direction, power and
range/frequency response.

Direction
As human beings, we feel most comfortable when the voice we hear appears
to come from the same direction as the image of the person speaking. This
means that reliance on ceiling speakers alone is not an ideal practice when the
system is used for videoconferencing. In many small and medium-sized
systems, front-firing speakers alone can provide proper direction and
adequate coverage. Larger rooms (greater than 12’x15’) probably need both
front-firing and side or top-fill speakers in order to maintain proper coverage
at nominal power levels.
In planning systems for larger rooms, we need to take advantage of the HAAS
effect. Basically stated, this is the human brain’s interpretation of sound
direction when the same sound arrives at the ear from two or more directions
within a certain time period. We attribute the direction of the sound to the
direction from which the sound is first perceived, even if it is mixed with that
same sound arriving from a completely different direction, as long as the two
(or more) instances of the sound are within about 30ms of one another. Since
sound travels faster electronically than it travels through the open air we may
need to add audio delay to the side firing or ceiling speaker arrays in order to
keep the primary perceived point source as the front of room/front-firing
speakers.

Power
Power is a function of loudspeaker efficiency and total available system
power. Most speakers operate in a power range that is broader than the range
in which they operate without distortion. For the purpose of conference
communication, we are interested in sound that has little or no distortion.
Sound that is reproduced accurately (with no distortion) will most accurately
represent the voice of the people from the far-end (our primary goal). Accurate
reproduction also will aid the echo-cancellation circuitry in the system,
minimizing the amount of echo that the system sends back to the people at the
far-end, and thereby increasing perceived ease of intelligibility and
understanding. Remember that any distortions present in the playback audio
system—whether harmonic, amplitude (gain compression) or temporal (time

A - 10


delays)—will be recognized by the echo canceller as “new audio information,”
and it will send those distortions to the far-end, perhaps wreaking havoc on
the system audio quality. In short, speaker power should be matched to
overall audio subsystem power. The speakers should provide adequate
coverage and be able to present approximately 80 to 85dBA-SPL (continuous)
at the local site with the system operating at nominal power utilization, and
have a peak reserve of 15 to 20dB before distortion.

Range/Frequency Response
The human ear is able to hear sounds in a very wide range of frequencies (as
low as 70Hz and as high as 12,000Hz). The human voice is able to produce
sounds in a narrower range (100Hz to 8,000Hz). Most spoken communication
occurs, however, in a range that is only 150Hz to about 6,000Hz. This means
that we need to select speakers that operate with ideal performance in a fairly
narrow range for human voice (as opposed to speakers used for music, that
may have ranges of 20Hz to 20,000Hz). We must also be alert to the crossover
characteristics of the speakers we select. Many coaxial and paraxial speakers
have their crossover within the middle audio frequencies, thereby inducing
potential distortion within the spoken frequency range and creating anomalies
within the system that hinder voice communication.

Video Elements
As a general rule, any display used in a videoconferencing environment
should be sized for the number of attendees, the physical distances involved
and the type of material presented onscreen. The screen size should allow for
clear and easy viewing at the various distances experienced within the room.
A measure of required screen size that often is applied to projection
technology is: no closer than 1.5 times the diagonal measure and no farther
than 7 times that measure. Nobody should have to sit closer than 2 times the
screen diagonal measure, nor farther than 8 times that measure.
Direct viewed tube-type displays (monitors) almost always are sharpest and
brightest in a videoconferencing environment. “Retro-projector cabinet”
displays (which look like largescreen TVs) are next in sharpness and
brightness, and “front-screen” projectors come in last. Glare and uncontrolled
ambient room lighting adversely affect the quality of the image most with
front-screen projectors and least with direct view tubes. A very limited
number of frontscreen projection systems have sufficient brightness and
contrast to be useful in a properly lit videoconference room.

A - 11


Video Projection for Use in Videoconference
Many installations make use of video projection devices. The most important
thing to remember in the planning of video projection for a videoconference
space is that front projection is vastly inferior to rear projection. Front
projection systems are less expensive and easier to implement, but the
conflicting interest between the camera and the projection display makes this
form of display a very poor choice. Front projection setups operate best when
the lighting in the room is dimmed or doused. When this is done, the
videoconference cameras can no longer operate, since they require even,
bright, color-corrected light. A direct conflict between these two technologies
is clear. In the event that a rear projection room cannot be set aside,
retro-projection units can be purchased from a number of manufacturers.
These units normally are available in sizes ranging from 40” to 72” diagonal
measure. To display high-quality video while maintaining optimum lighting
for interactive video meetings will require a projector of the “light-valve” or
DLP™ class.
Regardless of the exact type of projector selected and the exact nature of “front
versus rear,” there are certain essential rules for projector placement. The goal
in projection is to get the image beam to aim directly into the audience’s eyes.
In Western cultures the average distance from the floor to a seated person’s eye
is 4’. That distance becomes the target for the direct beam of the projector.
Again keep in mind that front projection should be avoided except in the most
extreme cases. If it is employed at all it must be used with an extremely bright
projector (2,500 lumens or greater for any space smaller than 25’x40’).

Cameras
There usually is a “main” or “local people” camera positioned on top center of
the display, so that it can “see” the participants and anything necessary at the
sides of the room, using pan and tilt features. If individual presentations may
be made from the side or “front of audience” area of the room, an additional
camera should be located at the back of the room, also mounted to allow a
view of the presenters when necessary. Some cameras contain an active
camera pointing system that also can be used effectively, given proper care in
the mounting of the camera assembly. The area immediately surrounding the
camera assembly needs to be acoustically “dead” to ensure that the voice
tracking and pointing algorithms work correctly. This is another reason to pay
close attention to the acoustic environment and acoustic treatment of any
space intended for use with this type of camera system.
If local presentation is blended with VC for any events, we must consider the
needs of the presenter who will not be “facing” the local image or inbound
image displays used by the main body of the local audience. One or two
monitors (and a camera) should be mounted at the back of the “audience-end”
of the room, with the horizontal centerline at approximately 5’ from the floor
for ease of presentation interaction between the presenter and the group(s) at
the farend(s). Remember that, with the exception of PC-based information that
is not in a standard composite narrowband video format, any information we

A - 12


wish to “show” or “view” must be translated to video, most often with some
sort of camera mechanism. Document cameras, 35mm slide-to-video units,
video scanners and scan conversion devices all are designed to take one format
of source material and convert it to a standard video signal that can be
digitized, shipped to the far-end(s), and converted back to composite video for
display. Which devices are selected and how they are used depends entirely
on the needs and goals of the end-users of the system(s) and the format of their
source materials.

Room Control Elements
To give all participants the easiest use of the room for any and all presentation
or conference purposes, a fully integrated room controller is recommended. It
is important that one controller operate all devices in the room so that only one
user interface needs to be learned by those managing the facility. The common
controller also makes it much easier to expand and enhance room capabilities
over time by adding or upgrading equipment. A proper room controller can
operate and coordinate the use of lighting, curtains, displays, audio devices,
VCRs and slide projectors, as well as all the conferencing equipment,
including any network-related control needed. In lieu of a complete control
system, a limited functionality controller can be located at the presentation
interface panel to control the switching and routing of the computer graphics
and configure the overhead camera video paths.
It is strongly advised that at least 20 percent of the time spent developing a
videoconferencing room be devoted to this important sub-system, as it will
complete the integration of the conference and presentation environment.
And remember that simpler is always better. People do not pay for technology.
They pay for the benefits that technology can bring. The doorway to those
benefits is a simple, straightforward and intuitive user control.

A - 13


A - 14

B
Categorical List of API Commands

The commands are categorized into these sections:
• API Utility Commands

• Audio Commands

• Call Commands
• Cameras, Content, and Monitors Commands

• Diagnostics and Statistics Commands

• Global Services Commands
• Home Screen Setting Commands

• Local Directory Commands

• Network Commands

• Notification Commands

• Security and Permissions Commands

• Serial Port Commands

• Streaming Commands

• Systems Settings Commands

B-1


API Utility Commands
• button on page 4-31 • rs232monitor on page 4-232
• dir on page 4-74 • run on page 4-236
• displayparams on page 4-81 • screen on page 4-237
• echo on page 4-89 • screencontrol on page 4-238
• exit on page 4-99 • showpopup on page 4-243
• get screen on page 4-119 • sysinfo on page 4-270
• help on page 4-139 • traceroute on page 4-278
• pause on page 4-198 • version on page 4-298
• popupinfo on page 4-203 • waitfor on page 4-305
• reboot on page 4-220 • wake on page 4-306
• remotecontrol on page 4-224 • whoami on page 4-309

Audio Commands
• alertusertone on page 4-11 • keypadaudioconf on page 4-158
• alertvideotone on page 4-12 • midrangespeaker on page 4-171
• audiotransmitlevel on page 4-24 • mute on page 4-180
• echocanceller on page 4-90 • muteautoanswer on page 4-181
• echocancellerred on page 4-92 • soundeffectsvolume on page 4-254
• echocancellerwhite on page 4-93 • subwoofer on page 4-268
• gendial on page 4-116 • subwooferoffset on page 4-269
• gendialtonepots (deprecated) on page 4-117 • volume on page 4-302
• generatetone on page 4-118

B-2


Call Commands
• allowmixedcalls on page 4-18 • maxtimeincall on page 4-168
• answer on page 4-21 • mcupassword on page
• autoanswer on page 4-25 • meetingpassword on page 4-170
• basicmode on page 4-28 • mpautoanswer on page 4-176
• calldetailreport on page 4-35 • mpmode on page 4-177
• callpreference on page 4-38 • muteautoanswer on page 4-181
• chaircontrol on page 4-46 • numdigitsdid on page 4-194
• contentauto on page 4-60 • numdigitsext on page 4-195
• dial on page 4-68 • phone on page 4-199
• dialchannels on page 4-70 • primarycallchoice on page 4-214
• encryption on page 4-98 • recentcalls on page 4-221
• farnametimedisplay on page 4-101 • requireacctnumtodial on page 4-228
• flash on page 4-102 • secondarycallchoice on page
• gendial on page 4-116 • setaccountnumber on page 4-241
• gendialtonepots (deprecated) on page 4-117 • validateacctnum on page 4-293
• hangup on page 4-138 • videocallorder on page 4-300
• maxgabinternationalcallspeed on page 4-165 • voicecallorder on page 4-301
• maxgabinternetcallspeed on page 4-166
• maxgabisdncallspeed on page 4-167

Cameras, Content, and Monitors Commands
• autoshowcontent on page 4-26 • monitor1 (deprecated) on page 4-172
• backlightcompensation on page 4-27 • monitor1screensaveroutput on page 4-173
• camera on page 4-41 • monitor2 (deprecated) on page 4-174
• cameradirection on page 4-44 • monitor2screensaveroutput on page 4-175
• camerainput on page 4-45 • mpmode on page 4-177
• colorbar on page 4-48 • numberofmonitors (deprecated) on page
• configdisplay on page 4-51 4-192
• configpresentation on page 4-56 • pip on page 4-201
• contentauto on page 4-60 • preset on page 4-204
• displaygraphics on page 4-78 • primarycamera on page 4-215
• dualmonitor on page 4-86 • snapshottimeout on page 4-247
• farcontrolnearcamera on page 4-100 • vcbutton on page 4-294
• graphicsmonitor on page 4-130 • vcrrecordsource on page 4-296
• h239enable on page 4-131 • vcstream on page 4-297

B-3


Diagnostics and Statistics Commands
• advnetstats on page 4-9 • netstats on page 4-185
• audiometer on page 4-23 • ping on page 4-200
• calldetail on page 4-34 • recentcalls on page 4-221
• callinfo on page 4-37 • rs232monitor on page 4-232
• callstate on page 4-39 • serialnum on page 4-240
• colorbar on page 4-48 • techsupport on page 4-273
• generatetone on page 4-118 • telnetmonitor on page 4-276
• getcallstate on page 4-120 • traceroute on page 4-278
• linestate on page 4-161 • xmladvnetstats on page 4-312
• nearloop on page 4-184 • xmlnetstats on page 4-313

Global Services Commands
• addressdisplayedingab on page 4-7 • gmsurl on page 4-129
• displayglobaladdresses on page 4-77 • registerthissystem on page 4-223
• enablesnmp on page 4-97 • requireacctnumtodial on page 4-228
• gabk on page 4-103 • setaccountnumber on page 4-241
• gabpassword on page 4-104 • snmpadmin on page 4-248
• gabserverip on page 4-105 • snmpcommunity on page 4-249
• gmscity on page 4-121 • snmpconsoleip on page 4-250
• gmscontactemail on page 4-122 • snmplocation on page 4-251
• gmscontactfax on page 4-123 • snmpsystemdescription on page 4-252
• gmscontactnumber on page 4-124 • systemname on page 4-271
• gmscontactperson on page 4-125 • techsupport on page 4-273
• gmscountry on page 4-126 • usepathnavigator on page 4-284
• gmsstate on page 4-127 • validateacctnum on page 4-293
• gmstechsupport on page 4-128

Home Screen Setting Commands
• allowdialing on page 4-17 • homerecentcalls on page 4-143
• dialingdisplay on page 4-71 • homesystem on page 4-144
• dialingentryfield on page 4-72 • homesystemname on page 4-145
• directory on page 4-75 • ipisdninfo on page 4-149
• displayipisdninfo (deprecated) on page 4-80 • localdatetime on page 4-163
• homecallquality on page 4-141 • marqueedisplaytext on page 4-164
• homemultipoint on page 4-142

B-4


Local Directory Commands
• abk on page 4-5 • confirmdirdel on page 4-59
• allowabkchanges on page 4-15 • directory on page 4-75
• confirmdiradd on page 4-58

Network Commands

IP Commands
• callpreference on page 4-38 • ipprecaudio, ipprecfecc, ipprecvideo
• defaultgateway on page 4-66 on page 4-150
• dhcp on page 4-67 • ipstat on page 4-151
• diffservaudio, diffservfecc, diffservvideo, • lanport on page 4-160
on page 4-73 • linestate on page 4-161
• displayipext on page 4-79 • mtumode on page 4-178
• dns on page 4-82 • mtusize on page 4-179
• dynamicbandwidth on page 4-87 • nath323compatible on page 4-183
• e164ext on page 4-88 • natconfig on page 4-182
• enablefirewalltraversal on page 4-94 • ntpmode on page 4-190
• enablersvp on page 4-96 • numdigitsdid on page 4-194
• gatekeeperip on page 4-106 • numdigitsext on page 4-195
• gatewayareacode on page 4-108 • subnetmask on page 4-267
• gatewaycountrycode on page 4-109 • tcpports on page 4-272
• gatewayext on page 4-110 • typeofservice on page 4-279
• gatewaynumber on page 4-111 • udpports on page 4-280
• gatewaynumbertype on page 4-112 • usefixedports on page 4-282
• gatewayprefix on page 4-113 • usegatekeeper on page 4-283
• gatewaysetup on page 4-114 • usepathnavigator on page 4-284
• gatewaysuffix on page 4-115 • wanipaddress on page 4-307
• h323name on page 4-132 • webport on page 4-308
• hostname on page 4-146 • winsresolution on page 4-310
• ipaddress on page 4-147 • winsserver on page 4-311
• ipdialspeed on page 4-148

B-5


ISDN Commands
The following commands are only applicable if you have an ISDN network
interface connected to your system
• bri1enable, bri2enable, bri3enable, bri4enable • priareacode on page 4-205
on page 4-29 • pricallbycall on page 4-206
• briallenable on page 4-30 • prichannel on page 4-207
• callpreference on page 4-38 • pricsu on page 4-209
• dialchannels on page 4-70 • pridialchannels on page 4-210
• isdnareacode on page 4-152 • priintlprefix on page 4-211
• isdncountrycode on page 4-153 • prilinebuildout on page 4-212
• isdndialingprefix on page 4-154 • prilinesignal on page 4-213
• isdndialspeed on page 4-155 • prinumber on page 4-216
• isdnnum on page 4-156 • prinumberingplan on page 4-217
• isdnswitch on page 4-157 • prioutsideline on page 4-218
• linestate on page 4-161 • priswitch on page 4-219
• maxgabinternationalcallspeed on page 4-165 • spidnum on page 4-255
• maxgabisdncallspeed on page 4-167

Telephony Commands
• callpreference on page 4-38 • telenumber on page 4-275
• teleareacode on page 4-274 • voicecallorder on page 4-301

V.35/RS-449/RS-530 Commands
The following commands are only applicable if you have a V.35 network
• callpreference on page 4-38 • h331videoprotocol on page 4-137
• cts on page 4-62 • rs366dialing on page 4-233
• dcd on page 4-64 • rt on page 4-234
• dcdfilter on page 4-65 • rts on page 4-235
• dsr on page 4-83 • st on page 4-257
• dsranswer on page 4-84 • v35broadcastmode on page 4-286
• dtr on page 4-85 • v35dialingprotocol on page 4-287
• h331audiomode on page 4-133 • v35num on page 4-288
• h331dualstream on page 4-134 • v35portsused on page 4-289
• h331framerate on page 4-135 • v35prefix on page 4-290
• h331videoformat on page 4-136 • v35profile on page 4-291
• v35suffix on page 4-292

B-6


Notification Commands
• all register on page 4-13 • nonotify on page 4-186
• all unregister on page 4-14 • notify on page 4-187
• button on page 4-31 • pip on page 4-201
• callstate on page 4-39 • registerall on page 4-222
• configchange (deprecated) on page 4-50 • sysinfo on page 4-270
• linestate on page 4-161 • unregisterall on page 4-281
• listen on page 4-162

Security and Permissions Commands
• adminpassword on page 4-8 • confirmdirdel on page 4-59
• allowabkchanges on page 4-15 • encryption on page 4-98
• allowcamerapresetssetup on page 4-16 • gabpassword on page 4-104
• allowdialing on page 4-17 • meetingpassword on page 4-170
• allowusersetup on page 4-20 • remotemonenable on page 4-226
• confirmdiradd on page 4-58 • useroompassword on page 4-285

Serial Port Commands
• rs232 baud, rs232port1 baud on page 4-230 • rs232monitor on page 4-232
• rs232 mode, rs232port1 mode on page 4-231

Streaming Commands
• allowstreaming on page 4-19 • streammulticastip on page 4-262
• numberofrouterhops on page 4-193 • streamrestoredefaults on page 4-263
• stream on page 4-258 • streamrouterhops on page 4-264
• streamannounce on page 4-259 • streamspeed on page 4-265
• streamaudioport on page 4-260 • streamvideoport on page 4-266
• streamenable on page 4-261

B-7


Systems Settings Commands
• colorscheme on page 4-49 • pip on page 4-201
• country on page 4-61 • roomphonenumber on page 4-229
• daylightsavings on page 4-63 • serialnum on page 4-240
• dialingdisplay on page 4-71 • sleep on page 4-244
• displayipext on page 4-79 • sleeptext on page 4-245
• displayparams on page 4-81 • sleeptime on page 4-246
• farnametimedisplay on page 4-101 • snapshottimeout on page 4-247
• keypadaudioconf on page 4-158 • snmplocation on page 4-251
• language on page 4-159 • systemname on page 4-271
• maxtimeincall on page 4-168 • teleareacode on page 4-274
• mpautoanswer on page 4-176 • telenumber on page 4-275
• ntpmode on page 4-190 • timediffgmt on page 4-277
• ntpserver on page 4-191 • version on page 4-298

B-8

C
Commands that Prompt Restart

The following commands return a prompt to restart the system.

To minimize the number of times your system restarts, Polycom recommends using
the user interface or the system’s web interface to configure the settings associated
with the following API commands.

• callpreference

• configdisplay monitor1 vga|s_video (prompts a restart only when changing
from composite or S-Video to VGA, or from VGA to composite or S-Video)
• configparam enable_ftp_access

• configparam enable_telnet_access

• configparam enable_web_access

• defaultgateway set

• dhcp off|client|server

• dns set

• enablesnmp
• hostname set

• ipaddress set

• lanport

• reboot yes

• subnetmask set

• snmpadmin

• snmpcommunity

• snmpconsoleip

• snmplocation

• snmpsystemdescription

• webport set

C-1


• winsresolution yes|no

• winsserver set
The restart prompt is:
Typing n cancels the restart. Typing y returns restarting in 3 seconds...
and the system reboots.

C-2

D
API Changes in This Version

The following changes have been made to the API for version 8.7.

Commands Introduced in Version 8.7
• configparam command on page 4-52

• enablepvec command on page 4-95

• overlayname command on page 4-196

• overlaytheme command on page 4-197
• showgatekeeper command on page 4-242

• snmptrapversion command on page 4-253

• vcraudioout command on page 4-295
• vgaqualitypreference command on page 4-299

Commands Newly Deprecated in Version 8.7
• configchange (deprecated) on page 4-50
• displayipisdninfo (deprecated) on page 4-80
• gendialtonepots (deprecated) on page 4-117

D-1


D-2

E
Status Messages

Status Display
The call status can be displayed in a number of ways. The getcallstate
command on page 4-120 returns a table listing the status, speed, and dialed
number of current calls.
To display real-time status on individual B channels (incoming or outgoing
calls), either register the API session with the callstate command on
page 4-39, or start an outbound call with the dial command on page 4-68.
These two commands will cause the system to re-direct the B channel status
messages to the session which has issued one of these two commands. For
example, if the RS-232 device issues a dial command, then call status is
directed to the RS-232 port; if a later session on a Telnet port issues a dial
command, then call status is also directed to that Telnet port.

B Channel Status Message Example
The following output example is for B channel status messages, where:

cs Indicates call status for one B channel.

RINGING Indicates a ring-in or ring-out and is equivalent to a 25% blue
sphere on the graphical user interface.

CONNECTED Is equivalent to a 50% yellow sphere.

BONDING Indicates the bonding protocol is operational on the channel and
is equivalent to a 75% orange sphere.

COMPLETE Is equivalent to a 100% green sphere.

E-1


Feedback Examples
• dial manual 384 5551212 ISDN
returns
Dialing manual
Dialing 5551212 384 none ISDN
cs: call[0] chan[0] dialstr[95551212] state[BONDING]

• hangup video 0
returns
cleared: call[0] line[1] bchan[0] cause[16] dialstring[95551212]
ended call[0]

E-2

Status Messages

• listen video
returns
listen video registered

listen video ringing // there is an incoming call, auto answer
is on

E-3


E-4

F
IR Codes for Non-Polycom Remotes

This appendix provides information about the IR signals for VSX systems.

This information is provided for reference only. Polycom claims no responsibility or liability for
programmed third-party remote control devices.

Notes

• Wake up—2.6 ms on, 2.6 ms off

• “0”—559 us (22 pulses at 38 kHz) on, 845 us (33 pulses at 38 kHz) off

• “1”—845 us (33 pulses at 38 kHz) on, 1192 us (46 pulses at 38 kHz) off

• EOM—559 us (22 pulses at 38 kHz) on

• System code—“00110101” or 35 hex

• Parity—“00” for even, “01” for odd, and inverts every other time. For
example, if parity is odd, first key press is 01, next is 11, next is 01, etc. The
first bit is the toggle bit; the second bit is the parity bit.

• Inter-burst timing—2200 pulse times at 38.062 kHz or 57.8 ms

• 38.062 kHz signal—at 1/3 duty cycle to LED
• Protocol—Wake up + System code + Key Code + Parity + EOM
The following table provides binary and hex codes for the IR signals you can
send to VSX systems.

Button/Signal Binary Code Hex Code Parity

0 110000 30H Even

1 110001 31H Odd

2 110010 32H Odd

3 110011 33H Even

F-1



4 110100 34H Odd

5 110101 35H Even

6 110110 36H Even

7 110111 37H Odd

8 111000 38H Odd

9 111001 39H Even

# 001100 0CH Even

* 001011 0BH Odd

Auto 011001 19H Odd

Call 100101 25H Odd

Call/Hang Up 000011 03H Even

Colon 101111 2FH Odd

Delete 100010 22H Even

Dial String 000000 00H Even

Directory 011010 1AH Odd

Dot 100001 21H Even

Down Arrow 000110 06H Even

Far 010001 11H Even

Feet Down 010110 16H Odd

Feet Up 011000 18H Even

Hang Up 100110 26H Odd

Home 011011 1BH Even

Info (Help) 010100 14H Even

Keyboard 100011 23H Odd

Left Arrow 001001 09H Even

Low Battery 010111 17H Even

Menu (Back) 010011 13H Odd

Mute 111010 3AH Even

Near 001111 0FH Even

Option 101000 28H Even

F-2

IR Codes for Non-Polycom Remotes


Power 100111 27H Even

Return 000111 07H Odd

Right Arrow 001010 0AH Even

Slides (Graphics) 010010 12H Even

Snapshot (Snap) 010101 15H Odd

Up Arrow 000101 05H Even

Volume Down 111100 3CH Even

Volume Up 111011 3BH Odd

Zoom In 001101 0DH Odd

Zoom Out 001110 0EH Odd

F-3


F-4

Index
Symbols command for ISDN 4-152
! command 4-3 command for PRI 4-205
command for system 4-274
A areacode command 4-22
abk command 4-5 attenuator, subwoofer volume 2-29
account number audio
command for requiring 4-228 cable 2-23
command for setting 4-241 connector, balanced 2-25
command for validating 4-293 integration 1-18
adapters audio commands B-2
BNC to S-Video 2-11 audio mode, command for H.331 calls 4-133
null modem 2-35 audio out, VCR 4-295
RS-232 2-20 audio port, command for stream 4-260
S-Video to RCA 2-22
audiometer command 4-23
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 2-4
audiotransmitlevel 4-24
addressdisplayedingab command 4-7
Authentication Pin 4-107
adminpassword command 4-8
auto answer, command for multipoint 4-176
advnetstats command 4-9
auto mode, command for multipoint display
alertusertone command 4-11
4-177
alertvideotone command 4-12
autoanswer command 4-25
all register command 4-13
all unregister command 4-14 B
Allow Video Display on Web 4-226 B channel status messages E-1
allowabkchanges command 4-15 backlightcompensation command 4-27
allowcamerapresetssetup command 4-16 bandwidth 4-299
allowdialing command 4-16, 4-17 basicmode command 4-28
allowmixedcalls command 4-18 baud rate, command to set RS-232 port 4-230
allowstreaming command 4-19 BNC adapter 2-11
allowusersetup command 4-20 BNC to S-Video cable 2-10
answer command 4-21 BRI cable 2-2
API briallenable command 4-30
using over LAN 3-3 brienable commands 4-29
using over RS-232 3-1
broadcaster setting 4-47
API utility commands B-2
broadcasting, V.35 command 4-286
area code
command for BRI 4-22 button command 4-31
command for gateway 4-108

Index – 1


C camera presets, command to allow 4-16
cables cameradirection command 4-44
analog telephone 2-3 camerainput command 4-45
audio 2-23 cameras, connecting
BNC to S-Video 2-10 ELMO camera 1-18
BRI 2-2 PowerCam as main camera 1-6–1-8
composite video 2-14 PowerCam as secondary camera 1-8
ImageShare II 2-37 PowerCam Plus as main camera 1-13
ISDN 2-2 PTZ camera 1-15
LAN 2-1 Sony camera 1-18
null modem 2-34
chaircontrol command 4-46
plenum-rated CAT5 adapters 1-5
POTS 2-3 city, command for GMS 4-121
PowerCam break-out 2-17 colorbar command 4-48
PowerCam control 2-18, 2-21 colorscheme command 4-49
PowerCam Plus primary 2-15 command, configuring parameters 4-52
PowerCam primary 2-16 composite video cable 2-14
PRI 2-2
configchange command 4-50
RS-232 2-30
RS-366 2-6, 2-7, 2-8 configdisplay command 4-51
RS-449 2-7 configparam command 4-52
RS-530 2-8 configpresentation command 4-56
serial 2-32 configuration settings 4-52
S-Video 2-9
configuring parameters 4-52
V.35 2-5, 2-6
VCR/DVD composite 2-12 confirmdiradd command 4-58
VGA 2-13 confirmdirdel command 4-59
VISCA 2-18 connectors
Visual Concert 2-36 balanced audio 2-25
Visual Concert to VTX 2-28 IR receiver 2-38
Vortex 2-24, 2-26 subwoofer 2-29
VSX to VTX 2-27 contact, command for GMS 4-122, 4-125
call commands B-3 content commands B-3
call quality, command for access 4-141 contentauto command 4-60
call speed conventions, syntax 4-2
command for Internet 4-166 country code
command for ISDN 4-167 command for gateway 4-109
international calls, maximum speed 4-165 command for ISDN 4-153
maximum command 4-165
country command 4-61
call status, displaying E-1
country, command for GMS 4-126
call type
primary 4-214 Crestron systems 2-35, 3-3
secondary 4-239 cts command 4-62
calldetail command 4-34
D
calldetailreport command 4-35
date and time, command to display 4-163
callencryption command 4-36
callinfo command 4-37 daylightsavings command 4-63
dcd command 4-64
callpreference command 4-38
dcdfilter command 4-65
callstate command 4-39
callstats command 4-40 defaultgateway command 4-66
dhcp command 4-67
camera command 4-41
diagnostics commands B-4
camera commands B-3

Index–2

Index

dial command 4-68 E
dialchannels command 4-70 e164ext command 4-88
dialing echo command 4-89
command for allowing 4-16, 4-17 echocanceller 4-90
command for RS-366 4-233
echocancellerred command 4-92
dialing order echocancellerwhite command 4-93
command for primary choice 4-214
command for secondary choice 4-239 Edgewater NAT/firewall traversal 4-94
command for video calls 4-300 ELMO cameras 1-18
command for voice calls 4-301 email contact, command for GMS 4-122
dialing prefix enablefirewalltraversal command 4-94
command for PRI international 4-211 enablepvec command 4-95
command for V.35 4-290 enablersvp command 4-96
dialing speed enablesnmp command 4-97
command for IP 4-148
encryption command 4-98
command for ISDN 4-155
dialing tones, generating 4-117 event notification commands B-7
exit command 4-99
dialingdisplay command 4-71
extension, command for gateway 4-110
dialingentryfield command 4-72
diffservaudio command 4-73
F
diffservfecc command 4-73
farcontrolnearcamera command 4-100
diffservvideo command 4-73
farnametimedisplay command 4-101
dir command 4-74
fax, command for GMS 4-123
directory
command for allowing changes 4-15 firewall traversal, NAT traversal 4-94
command for confirming additions 4-58 flash command 4-102
command for confirming deletions 4-59 frame rate, command for H.331 calls 4-135
directory command 4-75 fullscreen mode, command for multipoint
directory commands B-5 display 4-177
discussion mode, command for multipoint
display 4-177 G
display command 4-76 gabk command 4-103
displayglobaladdresses command 4-77 gabpassword command 4-104
displaygraphics command 4-78 gabserverip command 4-105
displayipext command 4-79 gatekeeper, command for mode 4-283
displayipisdninfo command 4-80 gatekeeperip command 4-106, 4-107
displayparams command 4-81 gatekeeperpin command 4-107
dns command 4-82 gateway, command for default 4-66
do not disturb setting gatewayareacode command 4-108
for multipoint calls 4-176 gatewaycountrycode command 4-109
for point-to-point calls 4-25 gatewayext command 4-110
dsr command 4-83 gatewaynumber command 4-111
dsranswer command 4-84 gatewaynumbertype command 4-112
DTMF dialing tones, generating 4-117 gatewayprefix command 4-113
dtr command 4-85 gatewaysetup command 4-114
dual stream setting, command for H.331 calls gatewaysuffix command 4-115
4-134
dualmonitor command 4-86
dynamicbandwidth command 4-87

Index–3


GDS homesystem command 4-144
command for display 4-77 homesystemname command 4-145
command for server 4-105 hostname command 4-146
password 4-104
gendial command 4-116 I
gendialtonepots command 4-117 icons, command for displaying 4-78
generatetone command 4-118 ImageShare II cable 2-37
get screen command 4-119 InstantDesigner, recommendation 1-18
getcallstate command 4-120 inverted signal
global directory command for CTS 4-62
displaying address in 4-7 command for DCD 4-64
maximum call speed 4-165, 4-166, 4-167 command for DSR 4-83
returning entries 4-103 command for DTR 4-85
global services commands B-4 command for RT 4-234
GMS command for RTS 4-235
command for email 4-122 command for ST 4-257
command for support number 4-128 IP command for line state changes 4-161
gmscity command 4-121 IP commands B-5
gmscontactemail command 4-122 IP dialing speed 4-148
gmscontactfax command 4-123 IP information display on home screen 4-149
gmscontactnumber command 4-124 ipaddress command 4-147
gmscontactperson command 4-125 ipdialspeed command 4-148
gmscountry command 4-126 ipisdninfo command 4-149
gmsstate command 4-127 ipprecaudio command 4-150
gmstechsupport command 4-128 ipprecfecc command 4-150
gmsurl command 4-129 ipprecvideo command 4-150
graphicsmonitor command 4-130 ipstat command 4-151
IR codes F-1
H IR receiver connector 2-38
H.323 commands B-5 ISDN cable 2-2
H.460 firewall traversal 4-94 ISDN command for line state changes 4-161
h239enable command 4-131 ISDN commands B-6
h323name command 4-132 ISDN dialing speed 4-155
h331audiomode command 4-133 ISDN information display on home screen 4-149
h331dualstream command 4-134 isdnareacode command 4-152
h331framerate command 4-135 isdncountrycode command 4-153
h331videoformat command 4-136 isdndialingprefix command 4-154
h331videoprotocol command 4-137 isdndialspeed command 4-155
hangup command 4-138 isdnnum command 4-156
help command 4-139 isdnswitch command 4-157
history command 4-140
history list 4-3 K
home screen IP and ISDN information display keypadaudioconf command 4-158
4-149
home screen setting commands B-4 L
homecallquality command 4-141 LAN cable 2-1
homemultipoint command 4-142 language command 4-159
homerecentcalls command 4-143 lanport command 4-160

Index–4

Index

linestate command 4-161 null modem
listen command 4-162 cable 2-34
localdatetime command 4-163 null modem adapter 2-35
numberofmonitors command 4-192
M numberofrouterhops command 4-193
marqueedisplaytext command 4-164 numdigitsdid command 4-194
maxgabinternationalcallspeed command 4-165 numdigitsext command 4-195
maxgabinternetcallspeed command 4-166
maxgabisdncallspeed command 4-167 O
maxtimeincall command 4-168 overlayname command 4-196
mcupassword command 4-169 overlaytheme command 4-197
meetingpassword command 4-170
P
midrangespeaker command 4-171
monitor parameters, configuring 4-52
command for graphics 4-130 parameters, setting multiple 4-52
command for split-screen 4-86 password
content presentation 4-56 command for administrator 4-8
monitor commands B-3 command for chair control 4-46
monitor1 command 4-172 command for GDS 4-104
command for meeting 4-170
monitor1screensaveroutput command 4-173,
remote access 4-285
4-175
room 4-285
monitor2 command 4-174
PathNavigator, command for multipoint calls
mpautoanswer command 4-176 4-284
mpmode command 4-177 pause command 4-198
mtumode command 4-178 People+Content, H.239 command 4-131
mtusize command 4-179 permissions commands B-7
multicast IP address, command for stream 4-262 phone call, command to answer 4-21
multipoint button, command for access 4-142 phone command 4-199
multipoint display mode, command for setting phone flash command 4-102
4-177
phone number
mute command 4-180 command for GMS contact 4-124
muteautoanswer command 4-181 command for GMS technical support 4-273
command for room 4-229
N command for system 4-275
name, video overlay 4-196 ping command 4-200
natconfig command 4-182 pip command 4-201
nath323compatible command 4-183 popupinfo command 4-203
nearloop command 4-184 port settings
netstats command 4-185 command for fixed 4-282
command for LAN 4-160
network commands B-5
command for stream audio 4-260
nonotify command 4-186 command for stream video 4-266
notification commands B-7 command for TCP 4-272
notifications, line state changes 4-161 command for UDP 4-280
notify command 4-187 command for VSX Web 4-308
ntpmode command 4-190 POTS cable 2-3
ntpserver command 4-191 POTS line, generating DTMF dialing tones 4-117

Index–5


PowerCam room design A-1
break-out cable 2-17 room layout examples 1-1–1-4
connecting as main camera 1-6–1-8 roomphonenumber command 4-229
connecting as secondary camera 1-8
router hops, command for stream 4-264
control cable 2-18, 2-21
primary cable 2-16 router hops, number of 4-193
PowerCam Plus RS-232
connecting as main camera 1-13 adapter 2-20
primary cable 2-15 cable 2-30
interface
presentation mode, command for multipoint
display 4-177 configuring 3-1
starting an API session 3-2
preset command 4-204
rs232 baud command 4-230
PRI cable 2-2
rs232 mode command 4-231
PRI channel information 4-208
RS-232 serial port commands B-7
PRI port assignments 2-2
rs232monitor command 4-232
priareacode command 4-205
rs232port1 baud command 4-230
pricallbycall command 4-206
rs232port1 mode command 4-231
prichannel command 4-207
RS-366 cable 2-6, 2-7, 2-8
pricsu command 4-209
rs366dialing command 4-233
pridialchannels command 4-210
RS-449 cable 2-7
priintlprefix command 4-211
RS-449 commands B-6
prilinebuildout command 4-212
RS-530 cable 2-8
prilinesignal command 4-213
RS-530 commands B-6
primarycallchoice command 4-214
RSVP, command to enable 4-96
primarycamera command 4-215
rt command 4-234
prinumber command 4-216
rts command 4-235
prinumberingplan command 4-217
run command 4-236
prioutsideline command 4-218
priswitch command 4-219 S
PTZ cameras, connecting 1-15 screen command 4-237
PVEC, command to enable 4-95 screen saver setting 4-173, 4-175
screencontrol command 4-238
Q
script file, command for running 4-236
quality preference 4-299
secondarycallchoice command 4-239
R security commands B-7
serial
RCA adapter 2-22
cable 2-32
reboot command 4-220
serial port commands B-7
recent calls button, command for access 4-143
serialnum command 4-240
recentcalls command 4-221
server
registerall command 4-222 command for DNS 4-82
registerthissystem command 4-223 command for GDS 4-105
remote control IR codes F-1 command for NTP 4-191
remotecontrol command 4-224 command for WINS 4-311
remotemonenable command 4-226 setaccountnumber command 4-241
repeat command 4-227 showgatekeeper command 4-242
requireacctnumtodial command 4-228 showpopup command 4-243
restarting, commands that require C-1 sleep command 4-244

Index–6

Index

sleeptext command 4-245 S-Video
sleeptime command 4-246 adapter 2-11, 2-22
snapshottimeout command 4-247 cable 2-9, 2-10
SNMP, command for enabling 4-97 syntax
command for help 4-139
snmpadmin command 4-248 conventions 4-2
snmpcommunity command 4-249
sysinfo command 4-270
snmpconsoleip command 4-250
system button, command for access 4-144
snmplocation command 4-251 system settings commands B-8
snmpsystemdescription command 4-252
systemname command 4-271
snmptrapversion command 4-253
Sony cameras, connecting 1-18 T
soundeffectsvolume command 4-254 tcpports command 4-272
SoundStation VTX 1000 technical support, command for GMS 4-128
cable 2-27, 2-28
techsupport command 4-273
command for state 4-304
configuration with VSX system 1-20 teleareacode command 4-274
connecting 1-19 telenumber command 4-275
speaker test, command for 4-118 telephony commands B-6
speed, command for video stream 4-265 Telnet session 3-3
spidnum command 4-255 telnetmonitor command 4-276
st command 4-257 theme, video overlay 4-197
statistics time in call, command 4-168
command for advanced network 4-9 timediffgmt command 4-277
command for advanced network in XML 4-312 tones, command for testing 4-118
command for IP 4-151 traceroute command 4-278
command for network 4-185
command for network in XML 4-313 typeofservice command 4-279
statistics commands B-4 U
status messages, B channel E-1
udpports command 4-280
status notifications, command for registering
unregisterall command 4-281
4-270
STD code, command for ISDN 4-152 URL, command for GMS 4-129
usefixedports command 4-282
stream command 4-258
usegatekeeper command 4-283
streamannounce command 4-259
streamaudioport command 4-260 usepathnavigator command 4-284
user settings, command for access 4-20
streamenable command 4-261
useroompassword command 4-285
streaming
number of router hops 4-193
V
streaming commands B-7
streammulticastip command 4-262 V.35 cable 2-5, 2-6
V.35 commands B-6
streamrestoredefaults command 4-263
V.35/RS-449/RS-530 adapter 2-4
streamrouterhops command 4-264
streamspeed command 4-265 v35broadcastmode command 4-286
v35dialingprotocol command 4-287
streamvideoport command 4-266
v35num command 4-288
subnetmask command 4-267
subwoofer command 4-268 v35portsused command 4-289
v35prefix command 4-290
subwoofer volume attenuator 2-29
v35profile command 4-291
subwooferoffset command 4-269

Index–7


v35suffix command 4-292 X
validateacctnum command 4-293 Xantech IR models 2-38
vcbutton command 4-294 xmladvnetstats command 4-312
VCR audio out, command for controlling 4-295 xmlnetstats command 4-313
VCR/DVD composite cable 2-12
vcraudioout command 4-295
vcrrecordsource command 4-296
vcstream command 4-297
version command 4-298
VGA cable 2-13
vgaqualitypreference
command for video calls 4-299
vgaqualitypreference command 4-299
video call, command to answer 4-21
video integration 1-5
video overlay name, setting 4-196
video overlay theme, setting 4-197
video protocol, command for H.331 calls 4-137
video quality 4-299
videocallorder command 4-300
VISCA cable 2-18
Visual Concert
cable 2-28, 2-36
command for controlling 4-294
command for stream 4-297
voicecallorder command 4-301
volume
command for subwoofer 4-269
volume command 4-302
Vortex
cable 2-24, 2-26
configuration with VSX system 1-20
connecting 1-19
vortex command 4-303
VSX cable 2-27
VTX cable 2-27, 2-28
vtxstate command 4-304

W
waitfor command 4-305
wanipaddress command 4-307
webport command 4-308
whoami command 4-309
winsresolution command 4-310
winsserver command 4-311

Index–8

Vsx series integrator_reference_manual

More Related Content

Viewers also liked (20)

Similar to Vsx series integrator_reference_manual (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Vsx series integrator_reference_manual